2021-2025 BMW IX SUV CONTROLS User Manual
MyCarUserManual.com
USER MANUALS FOR EVERY MAKE & MODEL

CONTROLS for Your BMW IX SUV First Generation (2021-2025)

Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Dashboard  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Vehicle features and options  
Additional information:  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
In the vicinity of the steering wheel  
1
Safety switch 103  
5
6
Seat setting 105  
Buttons for the central locking system 95  
Unlocking  
2
Power windows 100  
Locking  
3
4
Exterior mirror adjustment button 112  
Seating comfort features  
Opening the door  
Memory function 114  
7
Turn signal lever  
Seat settings menu 105  
36  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Turn signal 157  
Telephone, see Owner's Manual  
for Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communication 6  
High-beam headlights, head-  
light flasher 157  
Selection of configuration menus  
for instrument cluster and Head-  
up display 136  
8
Steering wheel buttons, left  
Using selection lists 146  
Turn speed control systems on/off  
215  
Accessing and resetting trip data  
151  
Select speed control system 215  
Resetting the G-Meter values  
153  
11 Wiper lever  
Store speed 215  
Wipers 166  
Enabling/disabling the warning  
for exceeding the permitted max-  
imum speed 213  
Rain sensor 167  
Adjusting the speed 215  
Cleaning the windshield 168  
Turning Personal CoPilot on/off  
Rear wiper in Canadian models  
169  
9
10 Steering wheel buttons, right  
Settings, instrument cluster 136  
Instrument cluster 136  
Rear wiper 169  
Settings for Head-up display 138  
Clean the rear window 169  
Volume, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communication 6  
12  
Horn, entire surface  
Audio, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment, Com-  
munication 6  
13  
Adjusting the steering wheel 114  
Voice control, BMW Intelligent  
Personal Assistant 59  
14 Lights  
37  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Exterior lighting menu 159  
15  
16  
Door emergency unlocking 95  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
158  
Opening and closing cargo area  
87  
Driving lights automatic 160  
Low-beam headlights 160  
Adaptive lighting functions 163  
Exterior lighting off 160  
In the vicinity of the center console  
1
Control display 54  
Hazard warning system 364  
3
4
5
6
Ventilation 279  
2
Button for glove compartment 291  
Controller with buttons 56  
Operating elements for entertainment sys-  
tem, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,  
Entertainment, Communication 6  
Climate control 269  
Defrost function 276  
Rear window defroster 276  
38  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting the volume  
Station/title forward  
Station/title back  
9
Automatic Hold 133  
Parking brake 131  
10 Selector lever 123  
11 Turning drive-ready state on/off  
122  
7
My Modes 129  
8
Parking assistance systems 239  
Vehicle settings menu 53  
Two-axle ride level control 267  
39  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
In the vicinity of the headliner  
1
Emergency Call, SOS 366  
5
6
7
Interior lights 164  
2
Camera  
Indicator light, front passenger  
airbag 173  
Gesture control 64.  
Interior camera 288  
Interior lighting menu 53  
3
4
Glass sunroof 103  
Reading lights 165  
40  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Sensors of the vehicle  
Vehicle features and options Cameras  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
Front camera  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Overview  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi-  
cle:  
The front camera is located in the radiator  
grille.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
Camera behind the windshield  
Camera behind the windshield.  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Front radar sensor.  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
The camera behind the windshield is located  
near the interior mirror.  
41  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
When the camera field of view is covered,  
for instance by a fogged up windshield or  
labels.  
Top view cameras  
▷
▷
▷
▷
If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.  
With exterior mirrors folded in.  
With open doors or open cargo area.  
When driving toward bright lights or strong  
reflections, e.g., setting sun.  
▷
▷
When it is dark outside.  
The camera has overheated due to exces-  
sive temperatures and temporarily turned  
off.  
One exterior mirror camera is located at the  
bottom of each exterior mirror housing.  
▷
During calibration of the camera immedi-  
ately after vehicle delivery.  
Rearview camera  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
Radar sensors  
Safety information  
Warning  
The rearview camera is located in the badge  
on the rear of the vehicle.  
The vehicle radar sensors and thus also the  
driver assistance systems can be impaired by  
external influences, e.g., interference. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
age. Watch the surrounding traffic situation  
closely, be ready to take over steering and  
braking at any time, and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
Functional requirement of the  
cameras  
The areas of the cameras are clean and clear.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 372.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 374.  
System limits of the cameras  
The cameras may not work properly, e.g.,  
show something that is incorrect, in the follow-  
ing situations:  
▷
▷
In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.  
On steep hills, in steep depressions or in  
tight curves.  
42  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Front radar sensor  
Functional requirement of the radar  
sensors  
The areas of the radar sensors are clean and  
clear.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 372.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 374.  
System limits of the radar sensors  
The function of the radar sensors may be re-  
stricted or not available, for instance in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
The front radar sensor is located in the radiator  
grille.  
▷
▷
▷
In case of dirty sensors.  
Radar sensors, side, front  
In case of iced-up sensors.  
If sensors are covered such as by labels,  
films or a license-plate carrier.  
▷
▷
▷
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-  
stance due to parking damage.  
If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-  
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.  
When the field of view of the sensors is cov-  
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow  
hills, vehicles or trailers.  
The radar sensors are located on the side of  
the front bumper.  
▷
▷
After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the  
road.  
Radar sensors, side, rear  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
The radar sensors are located on the side of  
the rear bumper.  
43  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirement of the  
ultrasonic sensors  
Ultrasonic sensors  
The areas of the ultrasonic sensors are clean  
and clear.  
Ultrasonic sensors, front  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 372.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 374.  
System limits of the ultrasonic  
sensors  
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-  
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in  
the following situations:  
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-  
tance systems are located in the front bumper.  
▷
▷
▷
If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by  
stickers.  
Ultrasonic sensors, rear  
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-  
stance due to parking damage.  
After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
▷
▷
For small children and animals.  
For persons with certain clothing, for in-  
stance jacket.  
▷
▷
With obstacles and persons at the edge of  
the lane.  
In case of external interference with the  
ultrasonics, for instance from passing ve-  
hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic  
sources.  
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-  
tance systems are located in the rear bumper.  
Ultrasonic sensors, side  
▷
▷
Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high  
moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex-  
treme heat, or strong wind.  
With tow bars and trailer hitches of other  
vehicles.  
▷
▷
▷
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.  
With moving objects.  
With elevated, protruding objects such as  
ledges.  
▷
With objects with corners, edges, and  
smooth surfaces.  
The ultrasonic sensors for the parking assis-  
tance systems are located on the sides of the  
front and rear bumpers.  
44  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
In the case of objects with fine surfaces or  
structures, e.g., wire mesh fences.  
▷
▷
For objects with porous surfaces.  
With small and low objects, for instance  
boxes.  
▷
▷
Low objects already displayed, for instance  
curbs, can be outside of the detection  
ranges of the sensors.  
With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in  
foam material.  
▷
▷
▷
With plants and bushes.  
In automatic car washes.  
In the event of uneven floors, e.g. speed  
bumps.  
▷
▷
If there are large amounts of exhaust gas.  
Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of  
the vehicle is not taken into account by the  
ultrasonic sensors.  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
45  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Operating state of the vehicle  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
Vehicle features and options  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Additional information:  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
Warning  
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in  
one of the three states:  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
▷
▷
▷
Idle state.  
Standby state.  
Drive-ready state.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
Idle state  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Principle  
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched  
off.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
General information  
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening  
from the outside and after exiting and locking.  
Establishing the sleep mode  
automatically  
The sleep mode is established automatically  
such as in the following situations:  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
▷
After several minutes, if no operation takes  
place on the vehicle.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
If the charge state of the vehicle battery is  
low.  
Depending on the configuration via iDrive:  
one or both front doors will be opened after  
driving when exiting the vehicle.  
46  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
In some situations, the idle state is not set au-  
Manually setting to standby  
tomatically, for instance during a phone call or  
when the low-beam headlights are switched  
on.  
General information  
Standby can be switched back on after the ve-  
hicle is automatically set to idle state.  
Establishing idle state when  
opening the front doors  
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established  
by opening the front doors. For this purpose,  
all passengers must exit the vehicle.  
Using the knurled wheel  
Press the knurled wheel on the  
center console. The control dis-  
play and the instrument cluster  
illuminate.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
Using the Start/Stop button  
Press the Start/Stop button. The  
control display and the instru-  
ment cluster illuminate.  
5. "Turn off after opening door"  
Establishing the sleep mode  
manually  
To establish idle state in the vehicle after com-  
pletion of trip:  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Press and hold the knurled  
wheel on the center console un-  
til the OFF indicator on the in-  
strument cluster disappears.  
OFF is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster. Drive-ready state  
is turned off and standby state  
turned on.  
Standby state  
Drive-ready state  
Principle  
General information  
When standby state is switched on, most func-  
tions can be used while the vehicle is station-  
ary. Desired settings can be adjusted.  
Drive-ready state is turned  
on/off using the Start/Stop but-  
ton.  
General information  
The vehicle is in the standby state after the  
front doors are opened from the outside.  
Activated drive-ready state is the equivalent of  
a running engine in conventional vehicles.  
To preserve the vehicle battery, use standby  
and the activated power consumers only as  
long as absolutely necessary.  
Deactivated drive-ready state is equivalent to  
switching the engine off.  
47  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
If the drive-ready state is turned on, the vehicle  
ready to drive and READY is displayed in the  
instrument cluster.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.  
To preserve the vehicle battery, switch off  
drive-ready state and any unnecessary power  
consumers when parked.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
Safety information  
Warning  
When driving in electric mode, pedestrians  
and other road users might pay less attention  
to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-  
tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and  
actively intervene where appropriate  
NOTICE  
Selector lever position P is automatically en-  
gaged when standby state is switched off.  
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk  
of damage to property. Do not switch off  
standby if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g.,  
in a car wash.  
Warning  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
1. Close the driver's door.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
2. Depress the brake pedal.  
3. Press the Start/Stop button.  
Most of the indicator lights and warning  
lights on the instrument cluster illuminate  
for different lengths of time.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
READY is displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter and a signal tone sounds.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
When the drive-ready state  
is switched on, READY is dis-  
played in the instrument cluster.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
48  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Turning off drive-ready state  
After stopping the vehicle:  
1. While the vehicle is stationary, depress the  
brake and apply the parking brake.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button.  
The READY indicator goes out and a signal  
tone sounds.  
The drive-ready state is switched off automat-  
ically if the driver's seat belt is not buckled  
when the driver's door is opened.  
49  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
BMW iDrive  
Safety information  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Warning  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible  
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic  
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use  
the systems and devices while the vehicle is  
stationary.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Display and operating  
concept  
Principle  
Main menu  
BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and oper-  
ating concept and includes a wide range of  
functions.  
General information  
The main menu is divided into different areas.  
General information  
Overview  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the functions  
can be operated as follows:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Via the control display.  
Via the Controller.  
Via the touchpad.  
Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.  
Via the gesture control.  
Via the operating elements on the steering  
wheel.  
1
Widgets  
Additional information:  
2
3
4
5
Status information  
Configuration bar for main display  
Temperature setting  
Menu bar  
Instrument cluster, refer to page 136.  
50  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Android Auto© menu  
Menu bar  
Depending on national-market version with  
associated function: Access to Android Auto.  
Android Auto enables the secure use of certain  
functions of a compatible Android smartphone  
via iDrive.  
Apps menu  
Access to apps and vehicle functions. A  
filter can be selected. If necessary, change the  
filter to see the apps you want.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
"All apps": All apps and functions are dis-  
played.  
Widgets  
Widgets show real-time information and dy-  
namic content such as current media or paired  
smartphones. The widgets also serve as but-  
tons and allow jumping to the relevant menu.  
"Infotainment": Only infotainment apps are  
displayed.  
"Vehicle": Only vehicle adjustment func-  
tions are displayed.  
"Recently used": The most recently used  
apps are displayed.  
Main display  
The main display shows real-time information  
and dynamic content such as the navigation  
map. This display also contains buttons and  
lets you jump to the desired menu.  
Media menu  
Access to entertainment system functions,  
e.g., radio stations or external device pairing.  
Status information  
Communication menu  
Access to telephone and message function  
as well as pairing and management of mobile  
devices, e.g., smartphones.  
General information  
The status field can be found in the upper area  
of the control display. Status information is dis-  
played in the form of icons. Depending on the  
equipment and national-market version, differ-  
ent icons are available.  
Navigation menu  
Access to navigation system, destination  
entry, and traffic information. Configurable  
map views and other functions such as points  
of interest.  
Telephone status information  
Icon  
Meaning  
Climate menu  
Active call.  
The Climate menu provides access to all  
climate control functions.  
Signal strength.  
SIM card missing.  
Apple CarPlay© menu  
Depending on national-market version with  
associated function: Access to Apple CarPlay.  
Apple CarPlay enables the secure use of cer-  
tain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone via  
iDrive.  
Entertainment status information  
Icon Meaning  
USB audio.  
Bluetooth audio.  
Smartphone audio.  
51  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Input and display  
Icon Meaning  
Connected Music with Spotify.  
Letters and numbers  
Time shift.  
Wi-Fi.  
Letters and numbers can be entered using the  
controller, touchpad, control display, or voice  
control, depending on vehicle equipment.  
Apple CarPlay.  
Android Auto.  
Icon  
Function  
Change between capital and  
lower-case letters.  
Satellite radio is switched on.  
Enter a blank space.  
Switching between languages.  
Use voice control.  
Status information messages  
Icon Meaning  
Number of notifications.  
Check Control message.  
Suppress private information.  
Do not disturb.  
Confirm entry.  
Shift the input area to the left  
or right.  
Entry comparison  
Message.  
When entering data from a database such as  
contacts, the selection is gradually narrowed  
down for each character entered, with charac-  
ters being added as necessary.  
Additional information:  
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
Activating/deactivating the functions  
Some menu items are preceded by an icon.  
Selecting the menu item enables or disables  
the function.  
Other status information  
Icon Meaning  
Sound output active.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Sound output deactivated.  
Activation word active.  
BMW ID or driver profile.  
Destination guidance active.  
Go to quick access.  
Function is activated.  
Function is deactivated.  
Enabling/disabling audible feedback  
For some functions, audio confirmation is  
given, e.g., sounds are emitted when operating  
the control display.  
Wireless charging active.  
Park Distance Control: sound active.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Park Distance Control: sound deacti-  
vated.  
3. "System settings"  
52  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
4. "Sound"  
Shortcuts can only be created with an active  
BMW ID or a driver profile.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Executing a function  
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control  
display.  
Quick access  
The quick link provides access to shortcuts,  
certain settings, and app recommendations.  
2. Tap the desired shortcut.  
Input  
Operation  
The function will work immediately. This  
means for instance that the connection is es-  
tablished when a phone number is selected.  
Show  
Swipe from top to bottom on the  
quick link. control display.  
Slide the controller up.  
Tap the icon on the status  
bar.  
Swipe from the bottom up on the  
quick link. control display.  
Slide the controller down.  
Deleting shortcuts  
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control  
display.  
Hide  
2. Press and hold the desired shortcut.  
3. "Delete shortcut"  
Activating/deactivating pop-ups  
For some functions, pop-ups are displayed  
automatically on the control display. Some of  
these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.  
Direct access  
General information  
The vehicle has buttons that can be used to  
access menus for the respective function di-  
rectly on the control display. Then continue the  
operation via iDrive.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Pop-ups"  
Overview  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Button Function  
Shortcuts  
Go to the Drive Settings menu on  
the center console.  
General information  
The iDrive functions can be stored on the  
shortcuts and called up directly, for instance  
radio stations, navigation destinations, phone  
numbers and menu entries.  
Go to the Exterior Lighting menu be-  
tween the steering wheel and driv-  
er’s door.  
Go to the Interior Lighting menu on  
the headliner.  
Storing a function  
1. Select the desired function.  
2. Press and hold the desired function.  
3. "Add to shortcuts"  
Go to the Seat Settings menu on the  
driver’s door.  
53  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
BMW Curved Display  
Warning  
Principle  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-  
erty. Secure loose objects or devices that are  
connected to the vehicle via a cable.  
The BMW Curved Display is a single-screen  
display in the instrument panel that is curved  
towards the driver. The BMW Curved Display  
comprises the instrument cluster on the driv-  
er's side and the control display.  
General information  
Follow instructions for cleaning the BMW  
Curved Display in the Care chapter.  
Additional information:  
Warning  
Caring for special components, refer to  
page 375.  
Objects in the area in front of a display can  
slip and damage the display. There is a risk  
of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not  
place objects in the area in front of a display.  
Overview  
Overview  
1
Instrument cluster 136  
Control display 54  
2
Control display.  
Control display  
Switching the control display on/off  
automatically  
The control display is turned on automatically  
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the  
control display is needed for operation.  
Principle  
The iDrive functions are displayed on the con-  
trol display.  
In certain situations, the control display is  
switched off automatically, for instance if no  
operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-  
eral minutes.  
54  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Switching the control display on/off  
manually  
Overview  
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control  
display.  
2. "Screen off"  
Tap the control display to turn it on again.  
Setting the brightness  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Controller  
3. "Displays"  
Buttons on the Controller  
4. "Control display"  
5. "Brightness at night"  
6. Make the desired setting.  
Button  
Function  
Call up the main menu.  
Depending on the light conditions, the bright-  
ness control may not be clearly visible.  
Go to Media menu.  
Go to Phone menu.  
Go to Navigation menu.  
Go to previous menu.  
System limits  
In the case of very high temperatures on the  
control display, for instance due to intense so-  
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced  
down to complete deactivation. Once the  
temperature is reduced, for instance through  
shade or air conditioning system, the normal  
functions are restored.  
Controller  
Principle  
Operation  
The Controller can be used to select menu  
items and enter the settings. The buttons can  
be used to open the menus directly.  
▷
Rotate the Controller to switch between  
menu options, for example.  
55  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Selecting menu items  
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu  
item is highlighted.  
2. Press the Controller.  
Adjusting the main display  
The main display can be adjusted in the main  
menu.  
▷
Press the Controller to select a menu  
option, for example.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. If necessary, tilt the Controller to select the  
main display.  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. Select the desired main display.  
Selecting a widget  
1. Use the Controller to select widgets.  
2. If necessary, turn the Controller until the de-  
sired widget is selected.  
▷
Slide the Controller in four directions to  
switch between menus, for example.  
3. Press the Controller.  
Switching between menus  
A new display opens after a menu item is se-  
lected.  
▷
Slide the Controller to the left.  
The current menu closes and the previous  
menu is displayed.  
▷
Press the button.  
Operating via the Controller  
The current menu closes and the previous  
menu is displayed.  
Opening the main menu  
Calling up the context menu  
Depending on the menu item, a context menu  
with additional options can be displayed.  
Press the button.  
The main menu is displayed.  
1. Select the desired menu item using the  
Controller.  
2. Press and hold the Controller.  
56  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
The menu consists of various areas, for in-  
stance:  
Operation via touchpad  
▷
"General help": Go to the Integrated Own-  
er's Manual.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, some iDrive  
functions can be operated with the controller  
touchpad.  
▷
"Add to shortcuts": define menu item as  
shortcut.  
The touchpad is located on the Controller.  
Touch the touchpad with your fingers. Do not  
use any objects.  
Entering letters and numbers  
Input  
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num-  
bers.  
Selecting functions  
1.  
Apps menu  
2.  
: confirm entry.  
2. "Vehicle"  
Additional information:  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Touchpad"  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 62.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Deleting an entry  
Entering letters and numbers  
Icon Function  
▷
Enter characters as they are displayed on  
the control display.  
Press Controller: delete a letter or num-  
ber.  
▷
Always enter associated characters such as  
accents or periods so that the letter can be  
clearly recognized.  
Hold the Controller down: delete all let-  
ters or numbers.  
▷
The set language determines what input  
is possible. Where necessary, enter special  
characters via the Controller.  
Using alphabetical lists  
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-  
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can  
be displayed in a text box.  
Additional information:  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 62.  
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right  
quickly.  
Entering special characters  
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.  
Function  
Operation  
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-  
played in the list.  
Delete a charac- Swipe to the left on the  
ter.  
touchpad.  
Enter a blank  
space.  
Swipe to the right in the  
center of the touchpad.  
57  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting the main display  
Function  
Operation  
The main display can be adjusted in the main  
menu.  
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the  
upper area of the touch-  
pad.  
1.  
Tap on the icon.  
2. Swipe the configuration bar on the right  
side of the screen to the left.  
Enter an under- Swipe to the right in the  
score.  
lower area of the touch-  
pad.  
3. Select the desired main display.  
Sorting apps  
Using the map  
To resort the app icons, press and hold the de-  
sired icon and move it to the desired location.  
The map in the navigation system can be  
moved via the touchpad.  
Tap the map on the control display and then  
continue operation using the touchpad.  
Switching between menus  
A new display opens after a menu item is se-  
lected.  
Function  
Operation  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate di-  
rection.  
Select the arrow symbol.  
The current menu closes and the previous  
menu is displayed.  
Display menu. Tap once.  
Calling up the context menu  
Depending on the menu item, a context menu  
with additional options can be displayed.  
Using alphabetical lists  
Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries  
permit a direct jump to letters for which an en-  
try exists.  
Press and hold the desired menu item.  
The menu consists of various areas, for in-  
stance:  
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.  
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed  
in the list.  
▷
"General help": Go to the Integrated Own-  
er's Manual.  
▷
"Add to shortcuts": define menu item as  
shortcut.  
Operation via control display  
Entering letters and numbers  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the con-  
trol display is equipped with a touchscreen.  
Input  
1. If necessary, tap the  
display.  
icon or control  
You can tap on menu items and widgets.  
Touch the control display with your fingers. Do  
not use any objects.  
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.  
Opening the main menu  
Tap on the icon.  
The main menu is displayed.  
58  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Deleting an entry  
General information  
▷
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail-  
able depending on national-market version.  
Icon Function  
Tap icon: delete a letter or a number.  
▷
The system includes special microphones  
on the driver side and the front passenger  
side.  
Press and hold the icon: delete all let-  
ters or numbers.  
▷
▷
Say the commands and numbers fluently  
as well as with normal volume, emphasis,  
and speed.  
Using the map  
The navigation map can be moved on the con-  
trol display.  
›...‹ identifies commands that can be spo-  
ken.  
Function  
Operation  
Functional requirements  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate  
direction.  
▷
A language that is supported by the Per-  
sonal Assistant must be set via iDrive.  
Enlarge/shrink  
map.  
Drag in or out with the fin-  
gers.  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 62.  
Display menu.  
Tap once.  
▷
Always say commands in the configured  
system language.  
For the full range of functions, you must acti-  
vate, configure, or purchase the following func-  
tions:  
Using alphabetical lists  
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-  
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can  
be displayed in a text box.  
▷
Online speech processing, refer to  
page 62.  
1. Tap the letter in front of the list.  
A letter box is displayed.  
▷
For all settings under  
Data protection, refer to page 73.  
Activation word, refer to page 60.  
BMW ID or a driver profile.  
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry.  
▷
▷
▷
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-  
played in the list.  
Relevant ConnectedDrive services from the  
ConnectedDrive Store.  
BMW Intelligent Personal  
Assistant  
▷
Suggestions, refer to page 62.  
Activating the voice control system  
Principle  
General information  
There are various methods for activating the  
voice control feature:  
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a  
personal assistant that enables natural voice  
operation of various vehicle functions. The  
Personal Assistant makes it easier to operate  
the vehicle by providing proactive suggestions  
and automating habits.  
▷
Press the button on the steering  
wheel briefly.  
59  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
The microphone on the driver's side is ac-  
tive.  
The activation word should consist of multiple  
syllables to ensure good recognition.  
▷
Speaking the activation word.  
›Hello‹: The additional phrase is not necessary  
for the activation word and does not need to  
be spoken.  
The microphones on the driver's or front  
passenger's side are active with the follow-  
ing voice control, depending on where the  
activation word was spoken.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Then say the command. The activation word  
and the command can be spoken without  
pause in one sentence.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Wake word"  
Microphone button on steering wheel  
7. "Personal wake word"  
8. "Set"  
1.  
Press button briefly.  
2. Say the command.  
Activation word  
General information  
9. "Start recording"  
Activation word from third-party providers  
Depending on the national-market version,  
some third-party providers provide digital voice  
assistants such as Siri or Amazon Alexa.  
Saying the activation word will start the Per-  
sonal Assistant. The Personal Assistant lis-  
tens.  
To use Siri, the smartphone must be con-  
nected via Apple CarPlay.  
Supported voice assistants can be used with a  
connected smartphone in the vehicle.  
Preset activation word  
›Hello BMW‹: The default activation word can  
be activated and deactivated.  
The activation word from connected third-  
party providers can be used in addition to your  
preset or personal activation word from BMW.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Apps menu  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Wake word"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Additional speech assistants"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
7. ""Hello BMW""  
Personal activation word  
Canceling voice control  
In addition to the preset activation word, a  
personal activation word can be set up with  
an active BMW ID or a driver profile. The per-  
sonal activation word can also be changed or  
deleted.  
▷
▷
Press the button on the steering  
wheel again.  
›Cancel‹  
60  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Slide the Controller to the right or left.  
Press the Controller.  
Additional example commands can be dis-  
played on the control display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Possible commands  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Personal Assistant"  
4. "Help"  
General information  
Commands can be used to give instructions  
or ask questions, with the Personal Assistant  
providing assistance.  
5. "Example commands"  
Sample commands for the current context are  
displayed in the BMW Intelligent Personal As-  
sistant widget.  
For example, you can call contacts, navigate  
to an address, apply settings, or ask questions  
about a vehicle function. Most vehicle functions  
can be operated via voice commands, e.g., the  
Automatic Parking Assistant.  
Additional information:  
Adjust widgets, refer to page 58.  
Most content on the control display can be  
spoken as commands, e.g., menu items or list  
entries.  
Menu items  
The Personal Assistant can bring up menu  
items directly. Say the menu items as they are  
displayed on the control display. You do not  
have to follow the order of the menu items  
when speaking them out loud.  
Help for voice control  
▷
›Voice commands‹: have possible example  
commands suggested.  
1. Activate the voice control system.  
2. ›Media‹  
▷
›General information on voice control‹: have  
information on the operating principle of the  
voice control announced.  
3. ›Presets‹  
The stored stations are displayed on the  
control display.  
▷
▷
›Help‹: have tips and example commands  
for voice control announced.  
Additional example commands for the cur-  
rent context are displayed in the widget of  
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.  
Owner's Manual via voice operation  
You can ask simple questions about vehicle  
functions and the operation of the vehicle.  
Sample commands  
The voice activation system and the feed-  
back it provides do not replace the printed  
or Integrated Owner's Manual. The function  
is available depending on the national-market  
version. The speech recognition and quality of  
the feedback may vary.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
›Call John Smith‹  
›Drive me to JFK airport‹  
›Play a classical music station‹  
›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹  
›Activate the climate control‹  
›Increase the ACC distance‹  
›Sport mode‹  
Example command: ›How can the passenger  
airbag be deactivated?‹  
The Personal Assistant returns feedback.  
When stationary, the section of the integrated  
Owner's Manual is displayed on the control  
display.  
61  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Suggestions  
Settings  
General information  
Setting the system language  
The Personal Assistant provides helpful, indi-  
vidual suggestions.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Language"  
Activating/deactivating suggestions  
1.  
Apps menu  
5. Select the desired setting.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
Setting the response length  
You can set the Personal Assistant to use  
standard dialog or a short version. In case of  
the short version, the announcements by the  
Personal Assistant are played back in an ab-  
breviated version.  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Receive suggestions"  
Adapting suggestions  
Suggestions can be adapted, for example, by  
category or to output a signal tone.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Apps menu  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Response length"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Speaking during voice output  
Online speech processing  
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the  
Personal Assistant. The function can be dis-  
abled if requests are often canceled uninten-  
tionally, for instance due to background noise  
or conversations in the vehicle.  
Online speech processing improves the quality  
of the speech recognition and search results  
for points of interest. To use the functions,  
data is transmitted to a service provider via an  
encrypted connection and stored locally there.  
An active ConnectedDrive contract is required  
for online voice processing. ConnectedDrive is  
available depending on the national-market  
version. Online speech processing is not avail-  
able in all languages.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Speaking during voice output"  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
62  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Online speech processing"  
The device must be connected via Apple Car-  
Play or Android Auto.  
Configuring the visualization  
How the Personal Assistant is visualized can  
be set.  
1. Press and hold the  
button on the  
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.  
The voice activation of the smartphone is  
activated.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
If activation is successful, a confirmation  
appears on the control display.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
2. Press and hold the  
button on the  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Visualization"  
steering wheel to cancel voice control of the  
smartphone.  
Voice control from third-party  
providers  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration  
Depending on vehicle equipment, third-party  
voice control can be enabled by pressing and  
holding the microphone button on the steering  
wheel.  
Principle  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is available de-  
pending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version. Alexa is a digital assistant  
from Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Integra-  
tion, Alexa can be used in the vehicle. For  
safety reasons, the use of some Alexa func-  
tions may be restricted while driving your vehi-  
cle.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Long press"  
Functional requirements  
6. Select the desired setting.  
▷
A BMW ID or driver profile is activated.  
Adjusting the volume  
Turn the volume button during the voice guid-  
ance until the desired volume is set.  
▷
An active Amazon account must exist.  
Activating Amazon Alexa Car  
Integration  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in  
the vehicle and My BMW app if necessary.  
The volume remains constant even if the vol-  
ume of other audio sources is changed.  
Using the voice activation of the  
smartphone  
Follow the instructions from the Amazon Alexa  
app to set it up in the vehicle.  
Depending on the device, a smartphone con-  
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice  
control.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Amazon Alexa"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
63  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
After setting it up, use Amazon Alexa in the  
vehicle as follows:  
BMW Gesture Control  
Say the activation word "Alexa" and the de-  
sired command.  
Principle  
Several iDrive functions can be operated by  
hand motion using BMW Gesture Control.  
Information about the active function is dis-  
played on the control display. If the function  
is restricted, reconnect Bluetooth and Wi-Fi as  
necessary.  
Overview  
Automating routines  
General information  
The Personal Assistant can automate routines,  
for instance the automatic opening of windows  
in the same place. Rules are created for this  
purpose, which can be activated and deacti-  
vated at any time.  
The camera in the headliner detects gestures  
that are carried out in the area of the center  
console at the height of the control display.  
Activating/deactivating routines  
1.  
Apps menu  
The camera of the gesture control uses an in-  
visible Class 1 laser.  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Automate habits"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Activate/deactivate gesture control  
1.  
Apps menu  
System limits  
2. "Vehicle"  
▷
The Personal Assistant provides informa-  
tion about vehicle functions that may not be  
installed in the vehicle.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Gesture control"  
5. "Gesture control"  
This also applies to safety functions and  
systems.  
Settings  
▷
▷
Certain noises can be detected and may  
lead to problems. Keep the doors and win-  
dows closed.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Noises from the front passenger or occu-  
pants can impair the system. Avoid making  
other noise in the vehicle while speaking.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Gesture control"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
▷
▷
Major language dialects can cause prob-  
lems with the speech recognition feature.  
A poor data connection affects the re-  
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and  
search function.  
64  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Execute gestures clearly.  
Carrying out gestures  
The gestures can also be executed from  
the front-passenger side.  
▷
Perform gestures underneath the interior  
mirror and next to the steering wheel.  
Possible gestures  
Gesture  
Operation  
Function  
Move extended index finger forward and Accept call.  
backward in the direction of the control  
Select a highlighted entry in a  
list during voice control.  
Confirm pop-up.  
display.  
Swipe the hand in front of the control  
display in the direction of the passenger  
seat.  
Reject call.  
Close pop-up.  
End voice control.  
Move extended index finger slowly in a  
clockwise circular movement.  
Increase the volume.  
Gesture is detected after one circular  
movement.  
Move the extended index finger counter- Reduce the volume.  
clockwise in a circular movement.  
Gesture is detected after one circular  
movement.  
Depending on the  
equipment:  
Bring thumb and index finger together  
and move the hand to the right or left.  
Turn vehicle in the Live Vehi-  
cle view.  
3D view: rotate camera view.  
This gesture can only be exe-  
cuted while the vehicle is sta-  
tionary.  
Move fist with thumb extended to the left Reverse Skip function.  
back and forth.  
The previous title is played.  
65  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Gesture  
Operation  
Function  
Move fist with thumb extended to the  
right back and forth.  
Forward Skip function.  
The next title is played.  
With the index and middle fingers ex-  
tended, point into the direction of the  
control display.  
Perform individually assigna-  
ble gesture.  
Stretch out five fingers, form a fist and  
stretch five fingers out again.  
Perform individually assigna-  
ble gesture.  
Select function  
Assigning gesture individually  
Some defined functions can be selected di-  
rectly in the menu for gesture control.  
General information  
Two gestures can be assigned individually and  
can be configured as shortcut for certain func-  
tions such as:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Gesture control"  
▷
▷
▷
Destination guidance to home address.  
Mute/Playback  
5. "Point two fingers at display" or "Show five-  
o-five fingers"  
Control display on/off  
Gesture shortcuts can only be created with an  
active BMW ID or a driver profile.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
System limits  
Configure gesture shortcut  
Gesture recognition by the camera in the  
headliner can be disturbed by the following cir-  
cumstances:  
The desired function can be selected directly in  
every menu and configured as shortcut.  
1. Press and hold the desired menu item.  
2. "Add to gesture shortcuts"  
▷
▷
▷
The camera lens is covered.  
Objects are located on the interior mirror.  
3. Select the desired gesture.  
The camera lens is dirty, clean camera  
lens.  
Sensors and camera lenses, refer to  
page 374.  
▷
The gesture is executed outside of the de-  
tection range.  
66  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Wearing of gloves or jewelry.  
Smoking in the car's interior.  
The following information sources can also be  
used:  
▷
▷
Driver’s Guide app.  
Driver’s Guide Web.  
When taking a snapshot with the interior  
camera.  
Interior camera, refer to page 288.  
Safety information  
Connecting mobile devices  
to the vehicle  
Warning  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible  
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic  
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use  
the systems and devices while the vehicle is  
stationary.  
Principle  
Various connection types are available for us-  
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec-  
tion type to select depends on the mobile de-  
vice and the desired function.  
General information  
Detailed information on the functions and con-  
nection types can be found in the following  
media in the Owner's Manual under the speci-  
fied keyword:  
Overview  
The following overview shows possible func-  
tions and the suitable connection types for  
them. The range of functions depends on the  
vehicle equipment and the mobile device.  
▷
▷
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.  
Printed Owner's Manual for navigation,  
communication and entertainment.  
Function  
Connection type  
Icon on the con-  
trol display  
Making calls via the hands-free sys- Bluetooth.  
tem.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.  
Using phone functions via iDrive.  
Keyword: calling via Bluetooth.  
Playing music from a mobile device.  
Keyword: audio.  
Bluetooth audio.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.  
Calling without a mobile phone.  
Personal eSIM.  
Keyword: calling with the Personal  
eSIM.  
Keyword: Personal eSIM.  
Data exchange between mobile de-  
vice and vehicle.  
Wi-Fi.  
Keyword: vehicle WLAN.  
67  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Function  
Connection type  
Icon on the con-  
trol display  
Use Internet access via the personal Wi-Fi via personal hotspot.  
hotspot.  
Keyword: personal hotspot.  
Using Apple CarPlay via iDrive and  
via voice control.  
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and  
Keyword: Apple CarPlay preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.  
Using Android Auto via iDrive and via Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.  
voice control.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and  
Keyword: Android Auto preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.  
Playing music from a USB device.  
Keyword: audio.  
USB.  
Keyword: USB connection.  
Additional information:  
USB port, refer to page 285.  
68  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Functional requirements  
Additional information:  
▷
Active ConnectedDrive contract.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
▷
The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has  
been activated.  
▷
▷
Cellular network reception.  
BMW Remote Software  
Upgrade  
Consent to transmit the corresponding data  
was given in the Data Protection menu.  
Additional information:  
Principle  
Data protection, refer to page 73.  
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-  
date the entire software of the vehicle. This  
makes new functions, functional enhance-  
ments or quality improvements available.  
Search for an upgrade  
Functional requirement  
Standby must be turned on to search for a  
Remote Software Upgrade.  
General information  
BMW recommends performing the Remote  
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes  
available.  
Automatic search  
The vehicle regularly searches for updates in  
the background.  
Safety information  
Manual search  
Warning  
1.  
Apps menu  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
2. "All apps"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Search for upgrades"  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
69  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
and after the installation has been successfully  
completed, the information about the version  
can be displayed on the control display.  
Download of an upgrade  
Automatic download  
If available, the data for a Remote Software  
Upgrade is automatically downloaded to the  
vehicle. No download consent is required.  
This information is also available in the Con-  
nectedDrive customer portal.  
Displaying information  
Via My BMW App  
Display in the vehicle:  
If an upgrade is available, information on the  
new software version is displayed in the My  
BMW App.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
The data for the upgrade can then be down-  
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an  
existing WLAN connection.  
5.  
▷
Display currently installed version:  
"Installed version:"  
Data can then be sent from the mobile device  
to the vehicle.  
▷
Display new available version:  
"Info on version"  
This transmission method accelerates the  
download of the data, for instance in areas  
with limited mobile network availability.  
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
1. Download the upgrade using the My BMW  
App on your smartphone.  
Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal:  
 
2. Follow the instructions in the My BMW App.  
3. Connect your smartphone to the vehicle via  
Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi.  
Installing the upgrade  
Data for the upgrade is sent from the mo-  
bile device to the vehicle both while driving  
and when stopped. Depending on the size  
of the upgrade, it may be necessary to drive  
your vehicle to complete the data transfer.  
General information  
▷
Installation of the Remote Software Up-  
grade may result in the deletion of software  
changes, e.g., performance increases not  
made by the manufacturer of the vehicle.  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
▷
Modifications to the electrical system of the  
vehicle, for instance to control units, that  
have not been made by the vehicle manu-  
facturer can lead to an interruption of the  
installation.  
Additional information:  
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle,  
see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, Communication.  
▷
▷
The installation does not occur until the  
consent was given.  
Information about the version  
The installation may take around 20 to  
30 minutes.  
General information  
The information about the version contains a  
description of the updates included in the Re-  
mote Software Upgrade. During the download  
▷
▷
The installation cannot be terminated.  
The vehicle cannot be used during the in-  
stallation.  
70  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle can be exited during the instal-  
lation.  
▷
The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-  
cle for the consent for installation.  
Charging the vehicle is interrupted due to  
the installation.  
▷
▷
Switch off the exterior lighting.  
Remove the devices connected to the diag-  
nostic socket.  
Following the successful installation, charg-  
ing the vehicle may not continue automati-  
cally.  
Installing immediately  
The upgrade can be installed immediately if all  
prerequisites have been met.  
Prerequisites for the installation  
▷
Sufficiently charged battery.  
1.  
Apps menu  
▷
The outside temperature is above  
14 ℉/-10 ℃.  
2. "All apps"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Start upgrade now"  
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-  
tion.  
▷
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is turned off.  
The selector lever position P is engaged.  
Drive-ready state is switched off.  
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
If applicable, follow the notes for further pre-  
requisites on the control display.  
Installing with timer  
When the trip is completed, a timer can be  
used to install the upgrade automatically at  
a configured time such as during the night. It  
may be helpful to install the upgrade at a later  
time so that all functional requirements can be  
met, e.g., to allow the vehicle battery to charge  
sufficiently.  
Your vehicle can establish some prerequisites  
automatically. Follow the instructions on the  
control display.  
If the prerequisites are not met such as a suffi-  
ciently charged battery, the upgrade will not be  
offered for installation.  
Pay attention to an offer for installation, e.g.,  
after charging the battery for a longer period of  
time.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "System settings"  
Preparing the vehicle  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. Select the desired settings.  
The installation starts automatically when:  
▷
Park the vehicle safely away from the public  
road.  
▷
Cellular network reception must be ensured  
so that a fault message can be sent to the  
vehicle manufacturer, for instance if the in-  
stallation is terminated.  
▷
All prerequisites for the installation have  
been established correctly.  
▷
All prerequisites continue to be met at the  
time of installation.  
▷
▷
▷
Close the windows.  
Close the trunk.  
The timer is turned off when the drive-ready  
state is turned on.  
Remove energy consuming devices such as  
a mobile phone.  
71  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
After a longer stationary period, recharge the  
vehicle battery with the charging cable as nec-  
essary.  
Installing via the My BMW App  
Once all preparations are complete and all re-  
quirements are met, the upgrade installation  
can also be started using the My BMW App  
when the vehicle is parked. The upgrade in-  
stallation can be started remotely.  
Malfunction  
In the event of a malfunction, follow the in-  
structions on the control display or in the My  
BMW App.  
Follow instructions in the My BMW App.  
If the malfunction cannot be corrected, contact  
an authorized service center or another quali-  
fied service center or repair shop.  
Functional limitations  
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is  
temporarily unavailable, for instance:  
▷
▷
Hazard warning system.  
Validity of the Owner's Manual  
Central locking system and, if necessary,  
Comfort Access.  
Production of the vehicle  
At the time of production at the plant, the  
printed Owner's Manual is the most current  
resource.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking lights.  
Horn.  
Alarm system.  
Emergency call.  
After a software update in the vehicle  
Power windows.  
After a vehicle software update such as via Re-  
mote Software Upgrade the Integrated Own-  
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the lat-  
est information.  
Operate the tailgate or trunk lid.  
Lock the charging socket flap.  
Exit warning if needed.  
In vehicles with frameless doors, the window  
may no longer close completely.  
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked  
from the outside using the integrated key.  
In vehicles with an electrical lock, the lock may  
temporarily not work. In this case, the vehicle  
can be exited by unlocking the driver's door  
manually.  
Additional information:  
Buttons for central locking system, refer to  
page 95.  
After successful upgrade  
The vehicle can be used again immediately.  
Booked services such as Advanced Real Time  
Traffic Information or Remote Services are au-  
tomatically reactivated during the next trip.  
72  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
Personal settings  
This personal data can be permanently de-  
leted using iDrive.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
data is deleted:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
BMW IDs or driver profiles.  
Stored radio stations.  
Stored shortcuts.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Navigation, for instance stored destina-  
tions.  
Data protection  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Phone book.  
Data transfer  
Online data, e.g., favorites, cookies.  
Office data, for instance voice memos.  
Login accounts.  
Principle  
The vehicle offers different services, whose  
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv-  
ice provider.  
Digital key.  
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take  
up to 15 minutes. In addition, the vehicle is re-  
moved from the My BMW App and Connected-  
Drive customer portal so that remote functions  
can no longer be used.  
General information  
The data transfer can be deactivated for some  
services. When the data transfer is deacti-  
vated, the respective service cannot be used.  
Functional requirements  
Settings  
▷
Data can only be deleted while stationary.  
The data transfer can be configured in different  
stages or individually for separate services.  
▷
The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.  
Deleting data  
1.  
Apps menu  
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted  
when the vehicle is reset to the factory set-  
tings.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
Additional information:  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Resetting vehicle data, refer to page 73.  
Deleting personal data in the vehicle  
Reset vehicle data  
Principle  
All individual settings can be reset to the fac-  
tory settings when the drive-ready state is  
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores  
personal data such as stored radio stations.  
73  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
switched off. Data can only be deleted while  
the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle key must  
be in the vehicle.  
With driver recognition, a BMW ID or driver  
profile can be activated as soon as you unlock  
your vehicle. For this, a vehicle key or digital  
key must be linked with the BMW ID or driver  
profile. After unlocking, you can change the  
BMW ID or driver profile.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Reset vehicle data"  
5. "Reset vehicle data"  
If no BMW ID or driver profile is activated when  
the vehicle is unlocked, the vehicle loads the  
guest profile.  
If the synchronization of settings has been en-  
abled for a BMW ID in the vehicle, the personal  
settings are kept in the BMW Cloud.  
Functional requirements  
The vehicle must be stationary to create,  
change, delete, or edit a BMW ID.  
Logging in the vehicle with a BMW ID and  
synchronization with the BMW Cloud are only  
possible when the vehicle has cellular network  
reception.  
BMW ID/driver profiles  
Principle  
In ConnectedDrive countries, the BMW ID is  
the personal login for all relevant offers for the  
BMW brand. The BMW ID can be used in the  
vehicle to store and activate personal vehicle  
settings.  
Welcome window  
After unlocking the vehicle, a Welcome window  
is shown on the control display. The type of  
the welcome depends on the following prereq-  
uisites:  
In non-ConnectedDrive countries, the personal  
vehicle settings can be stored in driver profiles.  
▷
The vehicle does not have a stored BMW  
ID or driver profile:  
If a vehicle is used by several people, each per-  
son can use their own BMW ID in the vehicle. If  
a BMW ID is activated, the settings stored for it  
are applied to the vehicle.  
The welcome is neutral. An option to add a  
BMW ID or create a driver profile is offered.  
▷
The vehicle key or the digital key has not  
been assigned to a BMW ID or a driver pro-  
file:  
General information  
The welcome is neutral. The stored BMW  
IDs or the stored driver profiles are offered  
for selection. Additionally, it is possible to  
add a new BMW ID or create a new driver  
profile.  
The BMW ID must be registered once. A BMW  
ID can be registered via the My BMW App, in  
the ConnectedDrive Portal, or through an au-  
thorized service center.  
A driver profile is created in the vehicle.  
▷
A BMW ID or driver profile has been as-  
signed to the vehicle key or digital key:  
Many of the settings that are stored for a BMW  
ID in the vehicle can be synchronized with the  
BMW Cloud. This makes these settings availa-  
ble in any vehicle where the same BMW ID is  
used to log in.  
The welcome is personalized, the stored  
settings are activated. The BMW ID or the  
driver profile can be changed.  
As soon as the drive-ready state is turned on  
or the control display is tapped outside of the  
Welcome window, the welcome will be hidden.  
The vehicle can store seven BMW IDs or seven  
driver profiles.  
74  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
Adding the BMW ID  
My BMW app  
1.  
Tap the BMW ID icon or the personal  
image on the status bar.  
If a BMW ID has been added to a vehicle, the  
vehicle is automatically added to the My BMW  
App. This means that My BMW App functions  
can be used for this vehicle. To do so, the My  
BMW App must be used with the same BMW  
ID.  
2. "Add BMW ID"  
3. Scan the displayed QR code with your  
smartphone.  
4. Observe the instructions on your smart-  
phone.  
Alternatively, an authorized service center can  
add a vehicle to the My BMW App. In this case,  
the BMW ID must then be confirmed on the  
control display in the corresponding vehicle.  
▷
If you have installed the My BMW App  
on your smartphone and saved your  
BMW ID, the BMW ID is automatically  
transferred to the vehicle.  
In rare cases, the use of My BMW App func-  
tions for this vehicle may be restricted. More  
information is shown on the control display.  
▷
If you do not have a BMW ID yet, you a  
new BMW ID can be registered.  
5. Select the other settings you want to  
change, e.g., to configure driver recognition  
as desired.  
Creating a driver profile  
In countries where BMW ConnectedDrive is not  
available, driver profiles can be created.  
▷
To configure driver recognition, the cor-  
responding vehicle key or digital key  
must be detected in the vehicle.  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
2. "Add driver profile"  
Driver recognition can be set or changed in  
the settings at a later time.  
3. Enter the name for the driver profile.  
4. Select the desired setting:  
"Transfer settings"  
6. Change any additional settings as neces-  
sary.  
Alternatively, the BMW ID can be registered by  
an authorized service center and added to the  
vehicle. The BMW ID must then be confirmed  
on the control display in the corresponding ve-  
hicle.  
If the vehicle is in the guest profile, the set-  
tings of the guest profile will be applied.  
Primary user  
The primary user is the person who first adds  
their BMW ID to the vehicle and first adds the  
vehicle to their My BMW App. Alternatively, the  
primary user can be defined by an authorized  
service center.  
The vehicle is added to the user’s My BMW  
App.  
Confirming a BMW ID  
If the BMW ID was created by an authorized  
service center and added to the vehicle, you  
must then confirm the BMW ID in the vehicle:  
The primary user has access to the following  
settings, for example:  
▷
▷
Removing BMW IDs saved to the vehicle.  
1. Select the BMW ID.  
Transferring the primary user role to an-  
other BMW ID.  
2. Scan the QR code shown.  
▷
▷
Change vehicle-wide data protection set-  
tings.  
3. Follow the instructions on your smart-  
phone.  
Create the main digital key.  
75  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
BMW ID, e.g., profile picture.  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 92.  
Navigation, e.g., recent destinations, home  
address, or map settings.  
Automatic driver recognition  
If driver recognition has been established, au-  
tomatic activation of the BMW ID or driver pro-  
file is triggered by the following actions:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Media, e.g., favorites or saved radio sta-  
tions.  
iDrive, e.g., main menu configuration, lan-  
guage, or units.  
▷
By unlocking the vehicle using the button  
on the assigned vehicle key.  
Personal Assistant, e.g., suggestions or ac-  
tivation word.  
▷
By unlocking the vehicle with a door handle.  
The assigned vehicle key or the assigned  
Digital Key must be carried with you.  
Exterior lighting, e.g., one-touch signaling  
and home lights.  
Settings from the following areas are only  
synchronized when you log in for the first time:  
▷
By automatic unlocking when approaching  
the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the  
assigned Digital Key must be carried with  
you. Depending on the country, it may not  
be possible to recognize the Digital Key.  
▷
Seating and climate comfort, e.g., driver’s  
seat position or temperature setting.  
▷
Data protection menu.  
If there are several vehicle keys or Digital Keys  
in the vicinity of the vehicle, activation of the  
BMW ID or driver profile is done according to  
the following priority:  
Selecting the BMW ID/driver profile  
If the BMW ID or driver profile could not be  
recognized when unlocking the vehicle, select  
the BMW ID or driver profile on the welcome  
window.  
▷
The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers  
the activation of the assigned BMW ID or  
the assigned driver profile.  
The BMW ID or driver profile can be changed  
at any time via iDrive:  
The guest profile is activated when the ve-  
hicle is unlocked using a key that is not as-  
signed to a BMW ID or driver profile.  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
▷
▷
If a vehicle key and a Digital Key are  
detected at the same time, the Digital  
Key triggers the activation of the assigned  
BMW ID or the assigned driver profile.  
2.  
▷
▷
"Change BMW ID"  
"Change driver profile"  
3. Select the BMW ID or driver profile.  
4. If necessary, enter the PIN.  
If another key is detected on the driver's  
door after activating the BMW ID or the  
driver profile, the BMW ID or the driver pro-  
file of the last key detected is activated.  
The BMW ID or the driver profile are activated,  
the stored settings are loaded.  
Guest profile  
The guest profile can be activated and  
changed by anyone.  
If no BMW ID and no driver profile are as-  
signed to this key, the guest profile is acti-  
vated.  
In the following cases the guest profile is auto-  
matically active:  
Setting synchronization  
If synchronization is switched on, settings from  
the following areas, for example, are continu-  
ously synchronized:  
76  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
A BMW ID has not yet been added or a  
driver profile has not yet been created.  
the BMW Cloud, the BMW ID data stored in the  
BMW Cloud will be retained.  
No BMW ID or driver profile has been as-  
signed to the vehicle key or the digital key  
that was used to unlock the vehicle.  
If the vehicle is removed from the primary us-  
er’s My BMW App, it will also be removed from  
the My BMW App of the other users. The cor-  
responding BMW IDs are removed from the  
vehicle.  
The following limitations apply to the guest  
profile:  
If the vehicle is reset to factory settings, it is  
removed from each user’s My BMW App, and  
all BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle.  
▷
Certain functions are not available, e.g.,  
navigation functions or saving favorites.  
▷
▷
The guest profile cannot be renamed.  
It is not possible to assign a PIN to the  
guest profile.  
Transfer of the vehicle key  
A vehicle key that is assigned to a BMW ID or  
a driver profile can be used to view or change  
the stored personal settings.  
▷
▷
It is not possible to assign driver detection  
to the guest profile.  
In ConnectedDrive countries, the synchroni-  
zation with the BMW Cloud is not possible.  
Before a vehicle key is transferred to other per-  
sons, any assigned driver detection should be  
canceled. Changes to the driver detection can  
be made in the settings of the BMW ID or the  
driver profile.  
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome  
screen or via iDrive:  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
The BMW Digital Key provides the option to  
transfer a digital key to permit other persons  
the use of your own vehicle.  
2.  
▷
▷
"Change BMW ID"  
"Change driver profile"  
Additional information:  
3. "Continue as guest"  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 92.  
Deleting the BMW ID/driver profile  
Settings  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
General information  
Settings added when adding a BMW ID or cre-  
ating a driver profile can be changed.  
2.  
▷
▷
"Manage BMW IDs"  
"Change driver profile"  
3.  
Tap the icon of the desired BMW ID or  
the desired driver profile.  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
Removing a BMW ID from the vehicle causes  
the vehicle to be removed from the My BMW  
App. If the BMW ID has been synchronized  
with the BMW Cloud, the data stored in the  
BMW Cloud is retained after the BMW ID is  
deleted. If the currently active BMW ID is re-  
moved, the guest profile is activated.  
2. "Settings"  
The following settings are available for the  
BMW ID:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
The type of driver detection.  
The profile picture.  
The synchronization with the BMW Cloud.  
The personal salutation.  
Removing a vehicle from the My BMW App  
removes the corresponding BMW ID from the  
vehicle. If the BMW ID was synchronized with  
77  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
The following settings are available for the  
driver profile:  
▷
▷
▷
The type of driver detection.  
The profile picture.  
The profile name.  
Selecting a profile picture  
The profile picture can be selected from the  
predefined profile pictures:  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Manage profile picture"  
4. "Select profile picture"  
The personal profile picture for a BMW ID can  
be adopted from the profile in the My BMW  
App. This requires that the synchronization  
with the BMW Cloud is activated in the set-  
tings. After transferring the profile picture from  
the My BMW App, you can only select one of  
the predefined images if the profile picture in  
the My BMW App is deleted or synchronization  
is deactivated.  
System limits  
A clear driver detection via the vehicle key or  
the digital key may not always be possible in  
the following cases, for example:  
▷
The driver changes, but the vehicle is not  
locked and unlocked.  
▷
When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-  
tal keys with an assigned BMW ID or driver  
profile are located in the outer area on the  
driver's side of the vehicle.  
▷
When the vehicle was unlocked via the My  
BMW App.  
The use of personal settings that are stored for  
a BMW ID in other vehicles is subject to techni-  
cal limitations. For example, settings may be  
stored for a system that is not available, or  
available in a non-compatible version, in other  
vehicles.  
78  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
diately seek medical help if there is any sus-  
picion that a battery or button cell battery has  
been swallowed or is located in any part of  
the body.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Overview  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Vehicle key  
General information  
Two vehicle keys are included in the scope of  
delivery, each containing an integrated key.  
Buttons on the vehicle key.  
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-  
tery.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, various settings are possible  
for the button functions.  
Unlock.  
A BMW ID or a driver profile with personal set-  
tings can be assigned to a vehicle key.  
Lock.  
Stationary climate control, refer to  
page 280.  
To provide information on maintenance rec-  
ommendations, the service data is stored in  
the vehicle key.  
Displaying the charging screen, refer  
to page 149.  
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle  
key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting  
the vehicle.  
Open the cargo area.  
Safety information  
Panic mode.  
Pathway lighting, refer to page 162.  
Warning  
The vehicle key has a button cell battery.  
Batteries or button cell batteries can be swal-  
lowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries  
within two hours, for example due to internal  
burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key  
and batteries out of reach of children. Imme-  
Additional vehicle keys  
Additional vehicle keys are available from an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
79  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
3. Remove the battery from the battery hous-  
Loss of vehicle keys  
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-  
placed by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
ing.  
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned BMW ID  
or driver profile, the connection to this vehicle  
key must be deleted. A new vehicle key can  
then be assigned to the BMW ID or driver pro-  
file.  
Replacing the battery  
4. Insert a CR2032 3V battery with the posi-  
tive side facing down.  
NOTICE  
5. Insert the battery housing into the vehicle  
key.  
Improper batteries in a battery-operated de-  
vice can damage the device. There is a risk  
of damage to property. Always replace the  
discharged battery with a battery with the  
same voltage, the same size and the same  
specification.  
1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and  
push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-  
move it from the side.  
6. Insert the cover into the vehicle key.  
Have old batteries disposed of by an  
authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop,  
or take them to a collection point.  
Integrated key  
2. Remove the battery housing from the vehi-  
cle key to the side.  
General information  
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked man-  
ually using the integrated key.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
integrated key will fit in the glove compart-  
ment.  
80  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Unlocking the vehicle manually  
1. Press the driver’s door handle cover cap  
inward.  
Warning  
The cover cap is opened slightly.  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
2. Pull the cover cap to the side so that the  
door lock is clearly visible.  
Removing the integrated key  
1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and  
push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-  
move it from the side.  
3. Unlock the door lock with the integrated key  
by turning it counterclockwise.  
4. Remove the integrated key from the door  
lock.  
2. Slide out the integrated key at the open  
side of the vehicle key.  
5. Press the cover cap in to close it.  
6. Press the cover cap in again to open it  
slightly.  
3. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle  
key.  
81  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
7. Pull on the cover cap until the door opens.  
If vehicle is de-energized:  
1. With the integrated key, close and lock all  
doors using the side door lock.  
8. Press the central locking button to unlock  
the other doors.  
With the vehicle de-energized: pull the lever  
in the other doors from the inside.  
2. Pull the door handles to make sure they are  
locked. If necessary, repeat the process.  
Locking the vehicle manually  
Alarm system  
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated  
key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-  
tem will be triggered when the door is opened.  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the vehicle.  
In this case, use the vehicle key emergency  
detection to switch off the alarm.  
Locking the vehicle  
If the vehicle is locked with the integrated key  
via the door lock, the alarm system will not be  
activated.  
1. Close all doors.  
2. Enter the vehicle on the front passenger's  
side and close the front passenger door.  
3. Press the central locking button to unlock  
all doors.  
Emergency detection of the vehicle  
key  
4. Exit the vehicle through the front passenger  
door.  
5. With the integrated key, close and lock the  
front passenger door using the side door  
lock.  
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready  
state if the vehicle key has not been detected.  
6. Pull the door handles to make sure they are  
locked. If necessary, repeat the process.  
82  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Proceed as follows in this case:  
tion of the vehicle key to turn on drive-ready  
state.  
1. Hold the rear of the vehicle key against the  
mark on the steering column. Pay attention  
to the display in the instrument cluster.  
Access to vehicle interior  
Safety information  
Warning  
2.  
▷
If the vehicle key is detected:  
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-  
onds.  
▷
If the vehicle key is not detected:  
Slightly change the position of the vehi-  
cle key and repeat the procedure.  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.  
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened  
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.  
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-  
hicle can be opened from the outside.  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable.  
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-  
function under the following circumstances:  
▷
▷
The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.  
Warning  
Fault of the radio link from transmission  
towers or other equipment with high trans-  
mitting power.  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
▷
▷
Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal  
objects.  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
Do not transport the vehicle key together  
with metal objects.  
Fault of the radio link from mobile phones  
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-  
ity to the vehicle key.  
Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-  
imity to other electronic devices.  
Warning  
▷
▷
Fault of radio transmission by a charging  
process of mobile devices, for instance  
charging of a mobile phone.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
The vehicle key is located in direct proximity  
of the wireless charging tray.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Place the vehicle key in a different location.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
▷
Fault of the radio link while charging the  
vehicle.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also  
be unlocked and locked from the outside with  
the integrated key. Use the Emergency detec-  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
83  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
Settings, refer to page 97.  
Welcome lights, refer to page 162.  
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 74.  
Actions during locking  
Depending on the settings, the following func-  
tions are performed when locking the vehicle:  
NOTICE  
The window will be lowered slightly when  
pulling on the door handle. In the event of  
frost, the window may be frozen solid and  
may not be able to be lowered. There is a risk  
of damage to property. When pulling on the  
door handle, make sure that the window is  
lowered. If necessary, remove snow and ice  
from the window. Do not open the door with  
force.  
▷
The locking of the vehicle can be confirmed  
with a light signal or a sound signal.  
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment, the exte-  
rior mirrors can be folded in automatically  
when locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers  
are switched on.  
The following functions are executed:  
▷
All doors, the trunk, and the charging  
socket flap are locked.  
Actions during unlocking  
Depending on the settings, the following func-  
tions are performed when unlocking the vehi-  
cle:  
▷
Anti-theft protection is switched on. This  
prevents the doors from being unlocked us-  
ing the lock buttons or the door openers.  
▷
Only the driver's door and the charging  
socket flap will be unlocked or all access to  
the vehicle will be unlocked.  
▷
The alarm system is switched on.  
If the drive-ready state is still turned on when  
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will honk  
twice. In this case, drive-ready state must be  
turned off using the Start/Stop button.  
▷
▷
The unlocking of the vehicle can be con-  
firmed with a light signal or a sound signal.  
The welcome light can be turned on when  
the vehicle is being unlocked.  
Additional information:  
Settings, refer to page 97.  
In addition, the following functions are exe-  
cuted:  
With the vehicle key  
▷
If a BMW ID or a driver profile was assigned  
to the vehicle key, this BMW ID or driver  
profile will be activated.  
Unlocking the vehicle  
Press the button on the vehicle key.  
▷
▷
The interior lights are switched on, unless  
they were manually switched off.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, folded-in  
exterior mirrors are folded out.  
If only the driver's door and charging socket  
flap have been unlocked due to the settings,  
press the button on the vehicle key again to  
unlock the other vehicle access points.  
If the exterior mirrors were folded in using  
the button inside the vehicle, they will not  
fold out when the vehicle is unlocked.  
The lighting functions may depend on the am-  
bient brightness.  
▷
▷
Anti-theft protection is switched off.  
The alarm system is switched off.  
84  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Locking the vehicle  
Unlock vehicle on front door  
1. Close the driver's door.  
2.  
Press the button on the vehicle key.  
All vehicle access points are locked.  
On the door handle  
Principle  
The vehicle can be accessed without operating  
the vehicle key.  
Reach into the recessed grip of a front door.  
The vehicle key is automatically detected near  
the vehicle.  
Unlocking the vehicle at the rear door  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Access.  
Depending on national-market version, the ve-  
hicle can also be unlocked and locked via the  
door handle using a compatible smartphone  
and digital key.  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 92.  
Press and hold the button in the recessed grip  
to unlock the vehicle and open the rear door.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
Locking the vehicle  
1. Close the driver's door.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone to unlock and lock using the Digital  
Key.  
2. Touch the grooved surface on the door  
handle of a closed front door with your fin-  
ger for approx. 1 second without reaching  
into the recessed grip.  
▷
▷
To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be  
outside of the vehicle near the doors.  
After locking, approx. 2 seconds must  
elapse before unlocking is possible.  
85  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Malfunction  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 92.  
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-  
ing request detection on the door handles.  
Actions during unlocking  
If the settings specify that only the driver's  
door and the charging socket flap will be un-  
locked, note the following:  
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock  
the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key  
or use the integrated key.  
Touchless unlocking/locking of the  
vehicle  
The driver's door and the charging socket flap  
will only be unlocked when the driver is within  
the unlocking zone of the driver's door.  
Principle  
Settings, refer to page 97.  
When the driver approaches the locked vehicle  
with the vehicle key, the vehicle is unlocked.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
When the driver walks away from the unlocked  
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be  
locked.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone for contactless unlocking and locking  
using the Digital Key.  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Access.  
▷
Automatic unlocking and locking must be  
activated in the settings.  
The vehicle will be unlocked when an author-  
ized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking  
zone.  
▷
▷
The drive-ready state must be turned off.  
If the vehicle has been in the idle state for  
several days, contactless unlocking/locking  
will only be available after the vehicle has  
been driven.  
The unlocking zone is located within a radius  
of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the vehicle.  
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key  
leaves the locking zone.  
Additional information:  
The locking zone is located within a radius of  
approx. 9 ft/2 m around the vehicle.  
Settings, refer to page 97.  
With the Key Card  
Depending on the national-market version,  
touchless unlocking and locking is also possi-  
ble for compatible smartphones with a digital  
key. Enable Bluetooth on your smartphone to  
do so.  
Principle  
The Key Card is a chip card on which the digi-  
tal key is installed. The Key Card can be used  
to unlock and lock the vehicle.  
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking  
zone for an extended period of time without  
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati-  
cally.  
Additional information:  
Key Card, refer to page 91.  
If someone is detected on a seat while locking  
the vehicle, the following restrictions apply:  
General information  
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.  
▷
The vehicle will be locked but not secured  
against theft.  
▷
The charging socket flap remains unlocked.  
86  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
sition of the near field communication antenna  
depends on the smartphone model.  
Locking/unlocking the vehicle  
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,  
make sure that all doors and the trunk are  
closed.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
What precautions can be taken to be able to  
open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in  
the vehicle key?  
Hold the activated Key Card directly at the cen-  
ter of the driver's door handle.  
▷
The app’s remote services offer the option  
to lock and unlock a vehicle.  
When locking the vehicle with the Key Card,  
make sure that all doors and the trunk are  
closed.  
This requires an active BMW Connected-  
Drive contract, and the app must be instal-  
led on a smartphone.  
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change  
the position of the Key Card and repeat the  
procedure.  
▷
Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via  
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.  
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is  
required.  
With the BMW Digital Key  
Access to the cargo area  
Principle  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, a digital key can be installed  
on a compatible smartphone and used to un-  
lock and lock the vehicle.  
General information  
The cargo area will be opened to the config-  
ured opening height.  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 92.  
Safety information  
Locking/unlocking the vehicle  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when operating  
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the travel path of the tailgate is  
clear during opening and closing.  
Hold the smartphone NFC antenna directly at  
the center of the driver's door handle. The po-  
87  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Warning  
On the trunk  
General information  
With Comfort Access, the cargo area can be  
accessed without activating the vehicle key.  
The tailgate swings back and up when it  
opens. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-  
age to property. Make sure that the travel  
path of the tailgate is clear during opening  
and closing.  
The key is automatically detected near the ve-  
hicle.  
Depending on the national-market version,  
compatible smartphones with a digital key are  
also detected automatically. In this case, the  
cargo area can be opened with a smartphone.  
Warning  
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the  
windows and heating elements while driving.  
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to  
property. Cover the edges and ensure that  
pointed objects do not hit the windows.  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 92.  
Functional prerequisites  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
With the vehicle key  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone to detect the Digital Key.  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.  
Opening the trunk  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the following settings can be  
changed:  
▷
Unlocking the cargo area with the vehicle  
key also unlocks the doors.  
▷
Before unlocking the cargo area with the  
vehicle key, first unlock the vehicle.  
Functional requirements  
Selector lever position P must be engaged to  
open the cargo area with the vehicle key.  
▷
▷
Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-  
ton on the trunk.  
With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key  
with you and press the button on the trunk.  
You must enable the setting for opening with  
the vehicle key.  
Locked doors are not unlocked.  
Additional information:  
Settings, refer to page 97.  
Opening the trunk  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key for approx. 1 second.  
88  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
When the vehicle starts moving.  
Closing the cargo area  
By pressing the button on the outside of  
the cargo area. Pressing it again closes the  
cargo area again.  
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the inside of the  
cargo area. Pressing it again closes the  
cargo area again.  
By pressing the button on the vehicle key.  
Pressing the button again continues the  
opening process.  
▷
▷
Press the button on the trunk.  
▷
By pressing or pulling the button in the  
driver's door. Pressing again continues the  
opening procedure.  
Pull the tailgate down slightly. The tailgate  
closes automatically.  
Inside the vehicle  
Interruption of the closing procedure  
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
Functional prerequisites  
The vehicle key or digital key must be located  
within the vehicle in order to close the trunk  
using the button inside the vehicle.  
▷
If the vehicle drives off with a jerky move-  
ment.  
▷
By pressing the button on the outside of  
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the  
cargo area again.  
When the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi-  
tion P must be engaged before the trunk lid  
can be opened using the button inside the ve-  
hicle.  
▷
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the inside of  
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the  
cargo area again.  
Opening the trunk  
By pressing the button on the vehicle key.  
Pressing it again opens the cargo area  
again.  
Press the button in the driver's door.  
By releasing the button in the driver's door.  
Pulling again and holding continues the  
closing motion.  
Closing the cargo area  
Pull and hold the button in the driver's  
door.  
Opening and closing the cargo area  
contactlessly  
An acoustic signal sounds before the trunk is  
closed.  
Principle  
Interruption of the opening  
procedure  
The opening procedure is interrupted in the  
following situations:  
You can open the cargo area contactlessly  
when carrying the vehicle key on your person.  
With automatic tailgate activation, the cargo  
area can also be closed contactlessly.  
89  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Sensors detect specific foot movements near  
the center of the trunk, and the trunk opens or  
closes.  
With these movements, the leg must pass  
through the ranges of both sensors.  
General information  
Function availability depends on vehicle equip-  
ment and national-market version.  
If the vehicle key is within the sensor range, the  
cargo area may open or close inadvertently if  
you unintentionally move your foot or if a foot  
movement is detected.  
The sensor has an approximate range of  
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear area.  
Before the cargo area opens, the hazard warn-  
ing system flashes.  
If contactless opening is used for the cargo  
area, the locked doors will not be unlocked.  
Moving a foot again will stop the opening proc-  
cedure. The subsequent foot movement will  
close the cargo area again.  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 92.  
Closing the cargo area  
Perform the foot movement for opening the  
cargo area.  
Functional requirements  
▷
To close the cargo area contactlessly, the  
automatic tailgate must be installed.  
The hazard warning system flashes and an  
acoustic signal sounds.  
▷
▷
Selector lever position P must be engaged.  
Moving a foot again will stop the closing proc-  
ess. The subsequent foot movement will open  
the cargo area again.  
Contactless opening and closing of the  
trunk must be activated in the settings.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone to open and close the cargo area  
contactlessly using the Digital Key.  
System limits  
The detection of the foot movement may be  
limited due to the following external conditions:  
Depending on vehicle equipment:  
No trailer hitches should be mounted.  
▷
▷
▷
Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle.  
Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Settings, refer to page 97.  
Movement in range of the sensors may cause  
the trunk to open unintentionally, e.g., due  
to running water when cleaning the vehicle  
or from heavy rainfall, or due to the moving  
brushes in a car wash. To prevent such un-  
intended opening of the cargo area in such  
cases, keep the vehicle key at a sufficient dis-  
tance from the rear of the vehicle.  
Opening the cargo area  
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at  
approx. one arm's length away from the  
rear of the vehicle.  
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the driv-  
ing direction and immediately pull it back.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: Objects  
mounted on a trailer hitch cannot be detected  
if the trailer power socket is not plugged in.  
90  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
A digital key that has already been paired with  
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The  
digital key must be activated via iDrive.  
Trunk emergency unlocking  
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key  
Card or take the Key Card with you because  
the active Key Card can be used to start the  
vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to  
a service appointment.  
Safety information  
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.  
The trunk is unlocked.  
NOTICE  
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the  
wireless charging tray at the same time, the  
Key Card could become damaged. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Do not place the  
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the  
same time as a mobile device.  
Malfunction  
Warning  
With manual operation of a blocked tailgate,  
it can release itself unexpectedly from the  
blocking. There is a risk of injury or risk of  
damage to property. Do not operate the tail-  
gate manually if it is blocked. Have the vehi-  
cle checked by an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Activating/deactivating Key Card in  
the vehicle  
General information  
When the BMW Digital Key is activated for the  
vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of the  
vehicle key.  
In the event of an electrical malfunction in the  
automatic tailgate, operate the unlocked tail-  
gate slowly with a smooth motion by hand.  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of  
paired digital keys.  
To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly  
only. Closing occurs automatically.  
Functional requirement  
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to  
activate and deactivate the Key Card.  
Key Card  
Principle  
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked  
and locked, as well as started.  
General information  
Key Card availability depends on vehicle equip-  
ment and national-market version.  
91  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Activating Key Card  
1. Place activated Key Card in the center of  
the smartphone tray.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button.  
After drive-ready state is switched on, the Key  
Card can be removed from the tray.  
Malfunction  
The vehicle may not be able to detect the Key  
Card if there are objects between the smart-  
phone tray and the Key Card, e.g., a wallet or  
smartphone case.  
1. Place Key Card in the center of the smart-  
phone tray.  
2. Follow instructions on the control display.  
BMW Digital Key  
Deactivating Key Card  
1.  
Apps menu  
Principle  
2. "Vehicle"  
BMW Digital Key lets you lock and unlock and  
start your vehicle using a compatible smart-  
phone.  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Digital Key"  
5. "Key Card"  
General information  
BMW Digital Key availability and functionality  
depend on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version.  
6. "Deactivate Key Card"  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of  
paired digital keys.  
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compat-  
ible smartphone or other compatible mobile  
devices.  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle  
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked with  
the activated Key Card.  
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible  
smartphone, this function must be offered by  
the smartphone manufacturer. The My BMW  
app can be used to check if the smartphone  
and vehicle are compatible and which func-  
tions are supported.  
Additional information:  
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 83.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
A BMW ID or a driver profile with individual  
settings can be assigned to a digital key.  
When using a smartphone as a digital key, it is  
helpful to carry the deactivated Key Card in the  
vehicle. In situations where the vehicle is to be  
given to another person, they can be given the  
Key Card instead of the smartphone. To do so,  
the Key Card must be activated via iDrive.  
Always take the vehicle key with you to a serv-  
ice appointment.  
92  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Forwarding authorization  
▷
▷
▷
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 74.  
Key Card, refer to page 91.  
To share the digital key, select the correspond-  
ing function on the smartphone, for instance in  
the Wallet app.  
 
As soon as a digital key is shared with another  
person, the person will receive an invitation.  
When the invitation is accepted, the digital key  
on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is compatible with BMW  
Digital Key  
The vehicle is linked with the Connected-  
Drive account of the vehicle owner.  
Limiting the range of functions  
Certain functions of the digital key can be lim-  
ited before handing it over. For instance, if the  
Digital Key is passed on to a novice driver, the  
switch-off for driving stability control systems  
can be disabled and the engine power can  
be reduced. For more information, refer to the  
ConnectedDrive Portal and My BMW app.  
The rechargeable battery of the smart-  
phone has a sufficient charge. The neces-  
sary minimum charge of the rechargeable  
battery depends on the smartphone.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone for contactless unlocking and locking  
using the Digital Key.  
Authentication  
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone  
model, an authentication may be required for  
security and safety reasons.  
Enabling the main digital key  
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a  
main digital key in the vehicle. The vehicle  
owner must prove his authorization for the ve-  
hicle for this purpose.  
An authorized vehicle key, the main digital key  
or another method may be used for authenti-  
cation. Follow the corresponding instructions  
on the smartphone or the control display.  
Proof of authorization can be started via the  
My BMW App or using the activation code in  
the corresponding smartphone function, e.g.,  
the Wallet app.  
Deleting digital keys  
Both vehicle keys must be located in the vehi-  
cle to be enabled.  
General information  
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the  
list of enabled digital keys.  
Follow the activation instructions in the Digital  
Key menu, on the app, or on the control dis-  
play.  
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.  
Sharing digital keys  
Deleting the main digital key  
The main digital key can be deleted from the  
smartphone or via iDrive.  
General information  
Digital key allows the sharing of digital keys  
with other people. This option is available via  
the smartphone that is enabled as main digital  
key. This function must be supported by the  
smartphone.  
The deletion of the main digital key is com-  
pleted immediately.  
Deleting a shared key  
Shared keys can be deleted using the smart-  
phone with the master Digital Key, using the  
93  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
smartphone with the shared key to be deleted,  
or via iDrive.  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle  
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked as fol-  
lows:  
The deletion via the smartphone using the  
main digital key will not be performed until the  
vehicle is used with a key other than the key to  
be deleted.  
▷
▷
Using the door handle.  
With Comfort Access: depending on the na-  
tional-market version, the vehicle can be  
locked and unlocked with no-touch activa-  
tion.  
If the smartphone associated with a shared  
key or iDrive is used to delete a shared key, it  
will be deleted immediately.  
BMW Digital Key availability and function-  
ality depend on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version.  
Deletion via iDrive  
To delete a digital key via iDrive, there must be  
an authorized vehicle key in the vehicle, or the  
master Digital Key must be in the smartphone  
tray.  
Additional information:  
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 83.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Using the smartphone tray  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Digital Key"  
5. If necessary, select the digital key.  
6. Delete the Digital Key.  
Resetting the function  
To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au-  
thorized vehicle key must be located in the ve-  
hicle.  
1. Place smartphone in the center of the  
smartphone tray.  
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function,  
all digital keys including the main digital key  
will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key is  
retained and deactivated.  
Ensure that the display is facing up.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on  
drive-ready state.  
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be  
unlocked, locked or started with a digital key.  
Inside the vehicle  
The main digital key must be enabled again to  
be able to use BMW Digital Key again.  
With Comfort Access, it is sufficient, depending  
on the country, for the smartphone with Blue-  
tooth enabled to be located inside the vehicle.  
Press the Start/Stop button to turn on drive-  
ready state.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Digital Key"  
Sale of the smartphone  
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior  
to selling the smartphone. This ensures that  
5. "Reset function"  
94  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
the smartphone can no longer be used for the  
vehicle.  
Buttons for the central  
locking system  
Changing smartphones  
General information  
The vehicle is automatically locked when driv-  
ing off.  
To use a new smartphone as a master Digital  
Key, activate the new smartphone according to  
the instructions for the master Digital Key. The  
previous master key is deleted when the new  
smartphone is activated.  
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle  
is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning  
system and interior lights are illuminated.  
Sale of the vehicle  
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital  
Key function or remove the vehicle from the  
ConnectedDrive account of the current vehicle  
owner.  
Overview  
When the vehicle is removed from the Con-  
nectedDrive account, all digital keys for the ve-  
hicle will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key  
is retained and deactivated.  
System limits  
With a digital key, the alarm system's interior  
motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor can only  
be deactivated using the control display.  
The central locking buttons are located on the  
front door.  
Additional information:  
Locking the vehicle  
Alarm system, refer to page 99.  
Press the button in the driver's door  
or front passengers door with the front  
doors closed.  
Malfunction  
Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal-  
function under the following circumstances:  
The vehicle is not secured against theft when  
locking.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is shielded from the sen-  
sors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover  
that is not suitable.  
Unlocking the vehicle  
Press the button in the driver's door or  
front passenger’s door.  
Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card  
are located between the smartphone and  
the smartphone cover.  
Fault of the connection from transmission  
towers or other equipment with high trans-  
mitting power.  
Opening the door  
Press the button.  
Shielding of the smartphone due to build-  
ings or metal objects.  
The door is unlocked and slightly open.  
Push the door outward.  
95  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The door can be pushed into the door lock  
without effort and the door will close automati-  
cally.  
Malfunction  
General information  
In case of a power failure, the driver's door can  
be unlocked manually.  
Safety information  
Overview  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed while operating  
the doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure  
that the area of movement of the doors is  
clear while opening and closing.  
Closing  
To close the doors, push lightly.  
The closing process is automatic.  
Lever in the driver's door.  
Valet parking mode  
Unlocking the driver’s door manually  
Principle  
In the valet parking mode, the control display is  
disabled.  
E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle  
is handed over for valet parking.  
General information  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
valet parking mode may not be available.  
Valet Parking mode has the following restric-  
tions:  
Pull the lever in the driver's door to unlock the  
driver's door.  
▷
Vehicle settings cannot be changed via  
iDrive.  
Soft-close automatic  
function  
▷
Settings stored to a BMW ID or guest pro-  
file cannot be changed.  
▷
▷
Personal data cannot be displayed.  
The audio system is muted, with the possi-  
ble volume of the audio system being lim-  
ited.  
Principle  
The soft-close automatic function reduces ef-  
fort and noise when closing vehicle doors.  
96  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
The integrated Universal Remote Control is  
deactivated.  
Unlocking and locking  
The availability of certain settings of the  
driving modes is limited.  
Doors  
1.  
Apps menu  
Additional information:  
2. "Vehicle"  
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 74.  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
Functional requirement  
The driver has registered in the vehicle with a  
BMW ID.  
5. "Unlock"  
6. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Driver's door only"  
Activating the valet parking mode  
Only the driver's door and the charging  
socket flap are unlocked. Pressing again  
unlocks the entire vehicle.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
▷
"All doors"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Valet parking mode"  
5. If necessary, "PIN"  
The entire vehicle is unlocked.  
Touchless unlocking/locking  
If the active BMW ID does not have an as-  
signed PIN, this PIN must be set now. The  
PIN is needed to deactivate the valet park-  
ing mode.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Comfort access"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
6. If necessary, enter the PIN.  
7. "Activate valet parking mode"  
Automatic unlocking  
Deactivating valet parking mode  
1. Select the desired BMW ID on the lock  
screen.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
2.  
▷
Enter the assigned PIN for the BMW ID.  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
If you have forgotten the PIN: enter the  
access data for the BMW ID.  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
If the selected BMW ID does not have  
an assigned PIN: enter the access data  
for the BMW ID.  
▷
▷
"Unlock doors at end of trip"  
"Unlock doors when in P"  
If locked, the vehicle unlocks automatically  
when drive-ready state is turned off or selector  
lever position P is engaged.  
Settings  
Automatic locking  
General information  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, various settings for opening  
and closing are possible.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
97  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
Depending on the equipment, the cargo  
area will be unlocked or opened.  
▷
▷
"Tailgate and door(s)"  
5. "Lock after a short time"  
Depending on the equipment, the trunk  
will be unlocked or opened and the  
doors are unlocked.  
The vehicle locks automatically after a short  
period of time if no door is opened after un-  
locking.  
"Tailgate will only open if vehicle is  
already unlocked"  
Confirmation signals from the vehicle  
The vehicle must be unlocked before  
the cargo area can be operated with the  
vehicle key.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
▷
"Lock tailgate button"  
Operating the cargo area with the vehi-  
cle key is disabled.  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
▷
▷
"Flash when unlocking"  
Adjusting the opening height  
You can set how far the tailgate can be  
opened.  
Unlocking is confirmed by two flashes.  
"Flash when locking"  
Locking is confirmed by one flash.  
With alarm system:  
When adjusting the opening height, make sure  
the clearance above the tailgate is at least  
4 in/10 cm.  
"Sound on lock/unlock"  
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound  
signals, locking is confirmed with one  
sound signal.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Tailgate"  
Folding mirrors in automatically  
1.  
Apps menu  
5. "Opening height"  
2. "Vehicle"  
6. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired  
opening height.  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
Opening/closing the cargo area  
contactlessly  
5. "Fold mirrors on lock/unlock"  
1.  
Apps menu  
Cargo area  
2. "Vehicle"  
Cargo area and doors  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Tailgate"  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Tailgate"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Tailgate"  
98  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Opening the doors with the alarm  
system switched on  
Alarm system  
The alarm system is triggered when a door  
is opened if the door was unlocked using the  
integrated key in the door lock.  
Principle  
The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic  
signal when someone attempts to open the  
locked vehicle incorrectly.  
Opening the cargo area with the  
alarm system switched on  
The cargo area can be opened even when the  
alarm system is switched on.  
General information  
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm  
system reacts to the following changes:  
After closing the cargo area, the cargo area will  
be locked and monitored again. The hazard  
warning system flashes once during closing.  
▷
Opening a door, the hood, or the cargo  
area.  
▷
▷
Movements in the vehicle interior.  
Changes in the vehicle inclination such as  
during attempts at stealing a wheel or  
when towing the vehicle.  
Panic mode  
You can trigger the alarm system if you find  
yourself in a dangerous situation.  
▷
▷
Disconnected battery voltage.  
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key  
and hold for at least 3 seconds.  
Improper use of the socket for OBD on-  
board diagnostics.  
▷
Briefly press the button on the vehi-  
cle key three times in succession.  
▷
Locking the vehicle while a device is con-  
nected to the diagnostic socket.  
To switch off the alarm: press any button.  
The alarm system signals these changes visu-  
ally and acoustically:  
Indicator light on the interior mirror  
▷
Acoustic alarm:  
Depending on local regulations, the acous-  
tic alarm may be suppressed.  
▷
Optical alarm:  
By flashing of the hazard warning system  
and headlights, where required.  
Do not modify the system to ensure function of  
the alarm system.  
Turning the alarm system on/off  
The alarm system is turned on as soon as the  
vehicle is locked from the outside.  
▷
▷
The indicator light flashes briefly every  
2 seconds:  
The alarm system is switched on.  
The alarm system is not switched on if the  
vehicle is locked from a greater distance with  
the My BMW App or manually from the inside.  
The indicator light flashes for approx.  
10 seconds, then flashes briefly every  
2 seconds:  
The alarm system is switched off as soon as  
the vehicle is unlocked.  
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor  
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate  
99  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed  
access points are secured.  
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion  
sensor can be switched off in such situations.  
When the remaining open access points  
are closed, the interior motion sensor and  
tilt alarm sensor will be turned on.  
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and  
interior motion sensor  
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key  
within 30 seconds as soon as the  
vehicle is locked.  
▷
The indicator light flashes even though all  
access points have been closed:  
Alarm system error.  
The indicator light illuminates for approx.  
2 seconds and then continues to flash.  
▷
▷
The indicator light goes out after unlocking:  
The vehicle has not been tampered with.  
▷
After turning off the standby state, an  
option to turn off the interior motion sensor  
and the tilt alarm sensor will be displayed  
on the control display.  
The indicator light flashes after unlocking  
until drive-ready state is switched on, but  
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:  
The alarm has been triggered.  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-  
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked  
again.  
Tilt alarm sensor  
The inclination of the vehicle is monitored.  
Ending the alarm  
Unlock the vehicle.  
The alarm system responds in situations such  
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi-  
cle is towed.  
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated  
key, the drive-ready state must subsequently  
be turned on via the emergency detection of  
the vehicle key.  
Interior motion sensor  
The vehicle interior is monitored.  
The alarm system triggers when movement is  
detected inside the vehicle.  
Window  
The windows must be closed for the system to  
function properly.  
General information  
When a window is frequently opened to the  
same position, this task can be performed by  
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. This is  
useful if you frequently use the same parking  
garage, for example.  
Avoiding unintentional alarms  
General information  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-  
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unau-  
thorized action occurred.  
Additional information:  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 59.  
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:  
▷
▷
▷
In car washes.  
In duplex garages.  
During transport on trains carrying vehicles,  
at sea or on a trailer.  
▷
With animals in the vehicle.  
100  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Depending on national-market version, the  
windows can also be closed via the door han-  
dle using a compatible smartphone and digital  
key.  
Safety information  
Warning  
When operating the windows, body parts and  
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of in-  
jury or risk of damage to property. Make sure  
that the travel path of the windows is clear  
while opening and closing.  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 92.  
Functional prerequisites  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance  
in your pants pocket.  
With the vehicle key  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone to close the window(s) using the dig-  
ital key.  
Opening windows  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key after unlocking.  
Closing the windows  
The windows open for as long as the button  
on the vehicle key is pressed.  
Closing the windows  
With Comfort Access: press and hold  
the button on the vehicle key after lock-  
ing.  
The windows close for as long as the button  
on the vehicle key is pressed.  
Touch the grooved surface on the door handle  
of a closed front door with your finger and hold  
it there without grasping the recessed grip.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in during locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
In addition to locking, the windows also closed.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in during locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
On the door handle  
Principle  
The windows can be closed using the door  
handle without operating the vehicle key.  
The vehicle key is automatically detected near  
the vehicle.  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Access.  
101  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Inside the vehicle  
Anti-trap mechanism  
Overview  
Principle  
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or  
body parts becoming jammed between the  
door frame and window while a window is be-  
ing closed.  
General information  
If resistance or blockage is detected while a  
window is being closed, the closing will be in-  
terrupted.  
Power windows  
Safety information  
Warning  
Functional requirements  
Accessories on the windows such as anten-  
nas can impact anti-trap mechanism. There  
is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in  
the area of movement of the windows.  
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
▷
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
The vehicle key or digital key must be inside  
the vehicle.  
Closing without the anti-trap  
mechanism  
In case of danger from the outside or if icing  
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-  
lows:  
Opening windows  
▷
Press the switch to the resistance  
point.  
The window opens while the switch  
is being held.  
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist-  
ance point.  
1. Pull the  
switch past the resistance  
point and hold it there.  
The window opens automatically.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
The window closes with limited anti-trap  
mechanism. If the closing force exceeds a  
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.  
Closing the windows  
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance  
point.  
2. Pull the  
switch past the resistance  
point again within approx. 4 seconds and  
hold it there.  
The window closes while the switch  
is being held.  
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resist-  
ance point.  
The window closes without the anti-trap  
mechanism.  
The window closes automatically.  
Pulling again stops the motion.  
102  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Safety switch  
Glass sunroof  
Principle  
Principle  
With the safety switch, it is possible to disable  
particular functions in the rear. The locking of  
functions is useful, for instance, when children  
or animals are carried in the rear.  
The glass sunroof can be set either transpar-  
ent or opaque for sun protection and screen.  
General information  
The glass sunroof is automatically set opaque  
when the vehicle with a transparent glass sun-  
roof is exited.  
General information  
The following functions can be disabled by  
pressing the safety switch:  
If the vehicle is unlocked within approx. 24  
hours, the glass sunroof will automatically  
switch to the transparent state.  
▷
Opening of rear doors by passengers in the  
rear.  
The rear doors can only be opened from  
the outside.  
Overview  
▷
Opening and closing of the rear windows  
using the switches in the rear.  
Button in the vehicle  
Overview  
Glass sunroof  
The safety switch is located on the  
driver's door.  
Functional requirements  
The glass sunroof can be operated under the  
following conditions.  
Turning the safety functions on/off  
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
Press the safety switch on the driver’s  
door.  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
The LED in the button illuminates  
when the safety function is switched on.  
Setting the glass sunroof opaque/  
transparent  
Press the button.  
103  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
The opaque glass sunroof is set transpar-  
ent.  
The transparent glass sunroof is set opa-  
que.  
Functional limitation  
The degree of transparency may vary at ex-  
treme temperatures.  
104  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear,  
the protective effect of the seat belt can no  
longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding  
under the seat belt in an accident. There is a  
risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat  
prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest  
so that it is in the most upright position as  
possible and do not adjust again while driv-  
ing.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Sitting safely  
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of  
the occupants can make a vital contribution to  
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
In the event of an accident, the correct seat  
position plays an important role. Follow the in-  
formation in the following chapters.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seats, refer to page 105.  
Adjusting seats  
Seat belts, refer to page 108.  
Head restraints, refer to page 110.  
Airbags, refer to page 171.  
General information  
The current seat position can be stored using  
the memory function.  
Seats  
Overview  
Safety information  
Warning  
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex-  
pected movements of the seat. Vehicle con-  
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Only adjust the  
seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is  
stationary.  
The switches for the seat settings are located  
at the front doors.  
105  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Seat settings menu  
Adjusting backrest tilt  
Press the button to go directly to the  
seat settings menu on the control dis-  
play.  
Setting the longitudinal direction  
Tilt switch forward or backward.  
Adjusting the seat position  
automatically  
General information  
Press switch forward or backward.  
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored  
in the active BMW ID or in the active driver  
profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is  
reactivated at a later time, the saved position  
will be called up automatically.  
Adjusting the height  
Activate/deactivate the function  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Seat comfort"  
4. Select driver’s seat.  
5. "Use automatically"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Press switch up or down.  
Adjusting seat tilt  
Lumbar support  
Principle  
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad-  
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar  
region of the spine. The lower back and the  
spine are supported for upright sitting position.  
Adjusting the lumbar support  
1.  
Apps menu  
Tilt switch up or down.  
2. "Vehicle"  
106  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
3. "Seat comfort"  
6. "Massage"  
4. Select desired seat.  
5. Select the desired function.  
6. Select the desired setting:  
7. If necessary, select the desired setting.  
The seat massage is stopped when the lumbar  
support is operated.  
▷
Press arrow left/right:  
Calibrating the front seats  
The curvature is increased/decreased.  
Press arrow up/down:  
▷
General information  
As soon as the electric seat setting no longer  
functions precisely, a Check Control message  
is displayed on the control display.  
The curvature is shifted up/down.  
Backrest width  
To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set-  
ting, the front seats must be calibrated.  
Principle  
Adjusting the backrest width may improve side  
support when cornering.  
Safety information  
General information  
The backrest width is changed by adjusting  
the side sections of the backrest.  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
Adjusting the backrest width  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Seat comfort"  
Calibrating the front seat  
1. Press the longitudinal direction switch for-  
ward for approx. 2 seconds until the seat  
stops.  
4. Select desired seat.  
5. Select the desired function.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
2. Repeat step 1 until the seat stops then  
moves slightly forward.  
Seat massage  
3. Press the switch forward for approx. 2 sec-  
onds again until the seat stops.  
Principle  
The seat massage ensures relaxed muscles  
and better blood circulation in the lumbar re-  
gion and can avoid fatigue.  
4. Repeat step 3 until the seat stops then  
moves slightly backward.  
As soon as the message on the control dis-  
play disappears, the calibration is complete.  
If the message remains active, repeat the cali-  
bration.  
Turning the seat massage on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
If the message is still shown after repeated  
calibration, have the vehicle checked by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
3. "Seat comfort"  
4. Select desired seat.  
5. "Massage"  
107  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Comfort exit  
Warning  
Principle  
Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one  
person will potentially defeat the ability of  
the seat belt to serve its protective function.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Do not strap in more than one person per  
single seat belt. Infants and children are not  
allowed on an occupant's lap, and must be  
transported and secured in designated child  
restraint systems.  
The seat position can be adjusted automati-  
cally to make it easier to get in and out of the  
vehicle.  
Activating/deactivating the setting  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Seat comfort"  
4. "Comfort exit"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Warning  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly  
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-  
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all  
occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.  
Seat belts  
General information  
The vehicle is fitted with five seat belts to en-  
sure occupant safety. However, they can only  
offer protection when adjusted correctly.  
Always make sure that seat belts are being  
worn by the occupants before driving off. The  
airbags supplement the seat belts as an ad-  
ditional safety device. The airbags do not re-  
place seat belts.  
Warning  
With a rear seat backrest that is not locked,  
the protective effect of the middle seat belt  
is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or  
danger to life. If you are using the middle seat  
belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.  
All seat belt anchorage points are designed to  
achieve the best possible protective effect for  
the seat belts when used properly and with the  
correct seat settings.  
The two outer seat belt buckles of the rear  
seats are intended for the persons sitting on  
the left and right.  
Warning  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, may not be fully operational or fail  
in the following situations:  
The center seat belt buckle of the rear seats is  
intended for the person sitting in the middle.  
Additional information:  
▷
The seat belts or seat belt buckles are  
damaged, soiled, or changed in any  
other way.  
Notes on sitting safely, refer to page 105.  
▷
Seat belt tensioners or seat belt winders  
were modified.  
108  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged in  
Unbuckling the seat belt  
1. Hold down the seat belt firmly.  
the event of an accident. There is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Keep clean and do  
not modify: seat belts, seat belt buckles, seat  
belt tensioners, seat belt winders, and seat  
belt anchors. After an accident, have the seat  
belts checked by an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
2. Press the red button in the seat belt buckle.  
3. Guide the seat belt back into the seat belt  
winder.  
Seat belt reminder  
General information  
Make sure that the seat belts are positioned  
correctly.  
Correct use of seat belts  
▷
Wear the seat belt tight to your body over  
your lap and shoulders, without twisting it.  
The seat belt reminder becomes active in the  
following situations:  
▷
Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over  
your lap. The seat belt must not press on  
your stomach.  
▷
▷
▷
When the seat belt on the driver's side or  
on the passenger's side is not fastened.  
When the seat belt is unfastened while driv-  
ing.  
▷
Do not rub the seat belt against sharp  
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard  
or fragile objects.  
When objects are lying on a seat.  
▷
▷
Avoid thick clothing.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-  
minates after turning on the drive-ready state  
when the seat belt reminder is active.  
Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward  
around your upper body area.  
Buckling the seat belt  
1. Guide the seat belt slowly over shoulder  
and hip to put it on.  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable. Check whether the seat belt has  
been fastened correctly.  
2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt  
buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage  
audibly.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Seat belt on the driver's seat is  
not buckled.  
Seat belt on the passenger  
seat or another seat in the ve-  
hicle is not buckled.  
Seat belt is buckled on the cor-  
responding seat.  
Seat belt is not buckled on the  
corresponding seat.  
To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an  
adjustable slider is available on the belt to help  
position the buckle when not in use.  
109  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-  
Rear Occupant Alert  
straint is as close as possible to the back  
of the head. Adjust the distance via the  
backrest tilt as needed.  
Principle  
At the end of a trip, the system informs the  
driver of the possible presence of occupants on  
the rear seats.  
For manually adjustable head restraints:  
After adjusting, make sure that the head  
restraint is correctly engaged.  
General information  
If a door with access to the rear row seating  
is operated within 30 minutes before starting  
off, a message appears on the control display  
when the trip is completed and a signal tone  
sounds.  
Warning  
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-  
tective effect in the head and neck area.  
There is a risk of injury.  
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.  
If the trip is continued within 30 minutes, the  
message is displayed again after the trip has  
been completed.  
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes  
hangers, directly on the head restraint.  
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-  
termined to be safe for attachment to a  
head restraint.  
Activate/deactivate the function  
1.  
Apps menu  
Do not use any accessories, for instance  
pillows, while driving.  
2. "System settings"  
3. "Rear Occupant Alert"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Adjusting the height  
The height of the head restraints cannot be  
set.  
Front head restraints  
Safety information  
Warning  
Adjusting the distance  
The distance to the back of the head is ad-  
justed via the backrest inclination.  
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint  
is as close as possible to the back of the head.  
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-  
straints can cause injuries in the head and  
neck area. There is a risk of injury.  
Removing the head restraints  
The head restraints cannot be removed.  
▷
Before driving, install the removed head  
restraints on the occupied seats.  
▷
Adjust the head restraint so its center  
supports the back of the head at as  
close to eye level as possible.  
110  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Folding down the middle head  
restraint  
Rear head restraints  
Safety information  
Warning  
General information  
To improve the view to the rear, the center  
head restraint can be folded down. Only fold  
down the head restraint if no one will be sitting  
in the center seat.  
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-  
straints can cause injuries in the head and  
neck area. There is a risk of injury.  
Folding down the head restraint  
▷
Before driving, install the removed head  
restraints on the occupied seats.  
▷
Adjust the head restraint so its center  
supports the back of the head at as  
close to eye level as possible.  
▷
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-  
straint is as close as possible to the back  
of the head. Adjust the distance via the  
backrest tilt as needed.  
For manually adjustable head restraints:  
After adjusting, make sure that the head  
restraint is correctly engaged.  
Press button, arrow 1, and fold the head re-  
straint back.  
To return the head restraint to its initial posi-  
tion, fold the head restraint forward as far as  
it will go. Make sure that the head restraint  
engages correctly.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when moving the  
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the area of movement is clear when  
moving the head restraint.  
Removing the center head restraint  
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be  
sitting in the center seat.  
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re-  
sistance.  
Warning  
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-  
tective effect in the head and neck area.  
There is a risk of injury.  
2. Press the buttons, arrow 1, and pull the  
head restraint out completely.  
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.  
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes  
hangers, directly on the head restraint.  
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-  
termined to be safe for attachment to a  
head restraint.  
Do not use any accessories, for instance  
pillows, while driving.  
111  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Installing the center head restraint  
Icon  
Meaning  
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head  
restraint.  
Fold the exterior mirror in and out.  
Adjust the exterior mirrors.  
Exterior mirrors  
General information  
The front passenger's side exterior mirror is  
more curved than the driver's side mirror.  
Select left exterior mirror, Automatic  
Curb Monitor.  
Select right exterior mirror.  
The exterior mirror adjustment is stored in the  
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If  
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated  
at a later time, the stored position is called up  
automatically.  
Adjusting the exterior mirrors  
Press the button.  
The current exterior mirror adjustment can be  
stored using the memory function.  
The selected exterior mirror moves  
along with the button movement.  
Safety information  
Selecting the exterior mirror  
Warning  
▷
Press the button to select the left  
exterior mirror. The LED illuminates.  
Objects in the mirror are closer than they ap-  
pear. The distance to the road users behind  
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance  
while changing lanes. There is a risk of ac-  
cident, injury, or property damage. Estimate  
the distance to the traffic behind by looking  
over your shoulder.  
▷
Press the button to select the right  
exterior mirror. The LED illuminates.  
Malfunction  
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the  
exterior mirror by pressing on the edges of the  
mirror glass.  
Overview  
Folding in/folding out the exterior  
mirrors  
NOTICE  
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle  
can be damaged in car washes. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Before washing,  
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.  
112  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Press the button.  
Interior mirror  
General information  
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.  
Folding is possible at vehicle speeds of up to  
approx. 12 mph/20 km/h.  
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is help-  
ful in the following situations:  
Photocells are used for control:  
▷
▷
In the mirror glass.  
▷
▷
In car washes.  
On the rear of the mirror.  
On narrow roads.  
Exterior mirrors that were folded in are folded  
out automatically at a speed of approx.  
25 mph/40 km/h.  
Overview  
Automatic heating  
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated  
as needed and when the drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
Automatic dimming  
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is au-  
tomatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior  
mirror are used to control this.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Keep the photocells clean.  
▷
Do not cover the area between the interior  
mirror and the windshield.  
Automatic Curb Monitor  
Principle  
Steering wheel  
Safety information  
Warning  
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on  
the passenger's side is tilted downward. This  
improves your view of the curb and other low-  
lying obstacles when parking, for instance.  
Activating the Automatic Curb Monitor  
Steering wheel adjustments while driving  
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move-  
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is  
a risk of accident, injury, or property damage.  
Adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is  
stationary only.  
1.  
Press the button. The LED illumi-  
nates.  
2. Engage selector lever position R.  
Deactivating the Automatic Curb  
Monitor  
Press the button. The LED illuminates  
and the LED of the driver’s side outside  
mirror goes out.  
113  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Electric steering wheel adjustment  
Safety information  
General information  
Warning  
The steering wheel adjustment is stored in the  
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If  
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated  
at a later time, the stored position is called up  
automatically.  
Using the memory function while driving can  
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel  
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Only retrieve the memory function  
when the vehicle is stationary.  
The current steering wheel position can be  
stored using the memory function.  
To make it easier to enter and get out of the  
vehicle, the steering wheel moves temporarily  
into the upper position.  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
Adjusting the steering wheel position  
Overview  
Press the switch to adjust the steering wheel  
forward/back position and height to the seat  
position.  
Memory function  
The memory buttons are located on the front  
doors.  
Principle  
The following settings can be stored and, if  
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-  
tion:  
Storing settings  
Using the button:  
1. Set the desired position.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seat position.  
Exterior mirror adjustment.  
Steering wheel position.  
Height of the Head-up display.  
2.  
Press the button. The LED illumi-  
nates.  
3. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2  
while the LED is illuminated. A signal  
sounds.  
114  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Via iDrive:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Seat comfort"  
4. Select desired seat.  
5. "Seat position"  
6. Save the desired seat position.  
Calling up settings  
Using the button:  
Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.  
The stored position is called up.  
The procedure stops when a seat setting  
switch or one of the memory buttons is  
pressed again.  
The adjustment of the seat position on the  
driver's side is interrupted after a short time  
while driving.  
Via iDrive:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Seat comfort"  
4. Select desired seat.  
5. "Seat position"  
6. Select the desired seat position.  
Seat climate control  
Various climate control functions are available  
for the seats.  
Additional information:  
Climate control, refer to page 269.  
115  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Transporting children safely  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child  
restraint systems and their components to  
become very hot. Persons may sustain burn  
injuries when touching the hot components.  
There is a risk of injury. Do not expose  
the child restraint system to direct sunlight  
or cover where necessary. If necessary, let  
the child restraint system cool down before  
transporting a child. Do not leave children un-  
attended in the vehicle.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
The right place for children  
Safety information  
Warning  
Children in the rear seat  
General information  
Accident research shows that the safest place  
for children is in the rear seat.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
Children younger than 13 years of age or  
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported  
in the rear seat in suitable child restraint sys-  
tems designed for the age, weight and size  
of the child. Children 13 years of age or older  
must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable  
child restraint system can no longer be used  
due to their age, weight, or size.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly  
on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without  
suitable additional child restraint systems.  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly  
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-  
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life. Secure children  
Warning  
A hot vehicle may result in death to persons,  
especially children, or animals. There is a  
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave  
people, especially children, or animals unat-  
tended in the vehicle.  
116  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child  
restraint systems.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Children on the front passenger  
seat  
The protective effect of child restraint sys-  
tems and their fastening systems which have  
been damaged or exposed to an accident  
can be limited or lost. A child cannot be prop-  
erly restrained in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life.  
General information  
Before using a child restraint system on the  
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,  
knee, and side airbags on the passenger's side  
are deactivated.  
Do not use child restraint systems which  
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-  
dent.  
Additional information:  
For automatic deactivation of front passenger  
airbags, refer to page 173.  
If attachment systems have been damaged  
or strained by an accident, have them  
checked and replaced by an authorized serv-  
ice center or another qualified service center  
or repair shop.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Active front passenger airbags can injure a  
child in a child restraint system when the air-  
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the front passenger airbags  
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER  
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.  
Warning  
The stability of the child restraint system is  
limited or compromised with incorrect seat  
setting or improper installation of the child  
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Make sure that the child restraint system fits  
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-  
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests  
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that  
seats and backrests are securely engaged or  
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the  
height of the head restraints or remove them.  
Installing child restraint  
systems  
General information  
Pay attention to the specifications and the op-  
erating and safety information of the child re-  
straint system manufacturer when selecting,  
installing, and using child restraint systems.  
On the front passenger seat  
Deactivating the airbags  
Warning  
Active front passenger airbags can injure a  
child in a child restraint system when the air-  
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the front passenger airbags  
117  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER  
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.  
Child seat security  
Before installing a child restraint system in the  
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,  
knee and side airbags on the passenger's side  
are deactivated.  
Additional information:  
For automatic deactivation of front passenger  
airbags, refer to page 173.  
The seat belts in the rear and the front pass-  
enger seat belt can be permanently locked to  
fasten child restraint systems.  
Seat position and height  
After installing a child restraint system, move  
the front passenger seat as far back as it will  
go and, if possible, bring it up to the highest  
position. This seat position and height ensure  
the best possible position for the belt and of-  
fers optimal protection in the event of an acci-  
dent.  
Locking the seat belt  
1. Pull out the seat belt strap completely.  
2. Secure the child restraint system with the  
seat belt.  
After mounting a universal child restraint sys-  
tem, adjust the tilt of the seat backrest so that  
the belt is not constrained.  
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in  
and pull it tight against the child restraint  
system. The seat belt is disabled.  
If the upper attachment point of the seat belt  
is located in front of the seat belt guide of the  
child seat, move the front passenger seat care-  
fully forward until the best possible seat belt  
guide position is reached.  
Unlocking the seat belt  
1. Unbuckle the seat belt buckle.  
2. Remove the child restraint system.  
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in  
completely.  
Backrest width  
Adjustable backrest width: Before installing a  
child restraint system on the front passenger  
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do  
not change the backrest width again and do  
not call up a memory position.  
LATCH child restraint  
system  
General information  
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-  
dren.  
Pay attention to the specifications, operating  
tips and safety instructions from the child re-  
straint system manufacturer when selecting,  
installing, and using LATCH child restraint sys-  
tems.  
118  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Position  
Mounts for lower anchors  
Icon  
Meaning  
General information  
The lower anchors may be used to attach the  
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child  
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child  
is restrained by the internal harnesses.  
The corresponding icon shows  
the mounts for the lower  
LATCH anchors.  
Seats equipped with lower an-  
chors are marked with a pair  
(2) of LATCH icons.  
Safety information  
For vehicles equipped with a  
middle seat:  
Warning  
If the lower anchors on child restraint system  
are not engaged correctly, the child restraint  
system will not be able to provide suitable  
protection. There is a risk of injury or danger  
to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are  
correctly engaged and that the child restraint  
system fits securely against the backrest.  
It is not recommended to use  
the inner lower anchors of  
standard outer LATCH posi-  
tions to fasten a child restraint  
system on the middle seat.  
Use the vehicle seat belt in-  
stead for the middle seat.  
Before attaching child restraint  
systems  
Pull the seat belt away from the area of the  
child seat mountings.  
Warning  
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-  
tachment points of the child restraint system  
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-  
tems only. If other objects are attached, the  
mounts or attachment points can be dam-  
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-  
age to property. Only attach child restraint  
systems at the corresponding mounts for the  
lower anchors or attachment points.  
Installing child restraint systems  
1. Mount child restraint system, see manufac-  
turer's information.  
2. Make sure that the child restraint system  
mount is correctly engaged in the lower an-  
chor on both sides.  
Child restraint systems with  
tether strap  
General information  
When attaching child restraint systems to the  
upper attachment points, observe the specifi-  
cations and the operating and safety informa-  
tion of the child restraint system manufacturer.  
119  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Attachment points for upper  
retaining strap  
Warning  
Icon  
Meaning  
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used  
for the child restraint system, the protective  
effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. En-  
sure that the upper retaining strap is guided  
to the upper attachment point without twist-  
ing and not over sharp edges.  
The respective icon shows the  
attachment point for the upper  
retaining strap. Seats with an  
upper top tether are marked  
with this icon. It is located on  
the rear seat backrest, the rear  
shelf or the rear seat.  
Warning  
Routing the retaining strap  
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the  
protective effect of the child restraint system  
is limited or nonexistant. In certain situations,  
for instance braking maneuvers or in case of  
an accident, the rear seat backrest can fold  
forward. There is a risk of injury or danger to  
life. Make sure that the rear seat backrests  
are locked.  
Warning  
1
Driving direction  
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-  
tachment points of the child restraint system  
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-  
tems only. If other objects are attached, the  
mounts or attachment points can be dam-  
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-  
age to property. Only attach child restraint  
systems at the corresponding mounts for the  
lower anchors or attachment points.  
2
3
4
5
6
Head restraint  
Hook for upper retaining strap  
Attachment point/eye  
Seat backrest  
Upper retaining strap  
Attaching the upper retaining strap  
to the attachment point  
1. Outer seats: guide the upper retaining strap  
over the head restraint to the anchor.  
Center seat: guide the upper retaining strap  
over or along both sides of the head re-  
straint to the attachment point.  
2. If there is a retaining strap, run it between  
the backrest and the cargo cover.  
120  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the  
mounting eye.  
4. Tighten the retaining strap.  
Locking the doors and  
windows in the rear  
General information  
In certain situations it may be advisable to se-  
cure the rear doors and windows, for instance  
when transporting children.  
Button in vehicle  
Press the button. The LED is illumi-  
nated when the safety function is  
turned on.  
The rear windows and doors are locked and  
cannot be operated in the rear.  
The door can now be opened from the outside  
only.  
121  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Driving  
Overview  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Start/Stop button  
The Start/Stop button is located on the  
center console.  
Principle  
Pressing the Start/Stop button turns drive-  
ready state on/off.  
Acoustic pedestrian protection  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, Acoustic Pedestrian Protection  
generates a continuous driving noise in vehi-  
cles with electric or electrically assisted drives.  
General information  
Drive-ready state turns on when the brake  
pedal is pressed while pushing the Start/Stop  
button.  
▷
With a stationary vehicle and drive-ready  
state turned on, as soon as the selector  
lever position P is exited.  
Pressing the Start/Stop button again turns  
drive-ready state back off and turns standby  
state back on.  
▷
With electric driving up to approx.  
20 mph/30 km/h.  
Drive-ready state cannot be turned on as long  
as the charging cable is connected or the  
charging socket cover is open.  
A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the  
environment. As a result, other road users,  
for instance pedestrians or cyclists, can better  
perceive the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
Drive-ready state, refer to page 47.  
Standby state, refer to page 47.  
Charging cable, refer to page 316.  
122  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷
The state of high-voltage battery charge is  
sufficient.  
Drive-ready state in detail  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
▷
The driver's door is closed.  
Charging cable is detached.  
The charging socket cover is closed.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
Driving  
1. Depress the brake pedal.  
2. Turn on drive-ready state.  
3. Engage selector lever position D, B or R.  
4. Depress the accelerator pedal to drive.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
State of charge in strong temperature  
fluctuations  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
In the case of strong temperature fluctuations  
and a low state of charge of the high-voltage  
battery, it may not be possible to start the ve-  
hicle again at the beginning of the next trip.  
Recharge vehicle with a low state of charge in  
time.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
1. Close the driver's door.  
Selector lever positions  
Display  
2. Depress the brake pedal.  
The engaged selector lever position is dis-  
played in the instrument cluster and on the  
selector lever.  
3. Press the Start/Stop button.  
A signal tone sounds. Drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
Gear position D  
Selector lever position for normal driving.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The READY display indicates  
that the vehicle is ready for driv-  
ing.  
The vehicle drives off slowly when the brake  
pedal is released.  
R reverse gear  
Engage selector lever position R only when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
Driving off  
N Neutral  
Functional requirements  
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without  
drive, for instance in car washes, in selector  
lever position N.  
Driving is possible when the following prereq-  
uisites are met:  
123  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Parking position P  
Engaging selector lever positions  
Selector lever position for parking the vehicle.  
In selector lever position P, the drivetrain is  
blocked and the parking brake is engaged.  
General information  
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you  
select a gear position or reverse gear, main-  
tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are  
ready to drive off.  
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-  
cally in situations such as the following:  
▷
After the drive-ready state is switched off  
and selector lever position D, R or B is en-  
gaged.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Only when the drive-ready state is switched  
on and the brake pedal is depressed is it  
possible to change from selector lever posi-  
tion P to another selector lever position.  
▷
If the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the  
driver's door is opened while the vehicle is  
stationary and selector lever position D, R,  
or B is engaged.  
▷
▷
The selection lever position P cannot be  
changed until all technical prerequisites are  
met.  
▷
After standby state is switched off, if selec-  
tor lever position N is engaged.  
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure to en-  
gage selector lever position P and apply the  
parking brake. Otherwise, the vehicle may be-  
gin to move.  
Before shifting out of selector lever position  
P, remove the charging cable from the vehi-  
cle; otherwise, the gearshift request will not  
be executed.  
Additional information:  
Parking brake, refer to page 131.  
Engage selector lever position R, N, D,  
B
1. Fasten driver's seat belt.  
B, gear position with high energy  
recovery  
2. Tilt or pull the selector lever into the desired  
direction, past a resistance point, if needed.  
The selector lever automatically returns to  
the center position when released.  
Principle  
Selector lever position B is a gear position with  
a high energy recovery.  
Changing between selector lever position D  
and B: pull selector lever to D/B.  
General information  
Selector lever position B offers the following  
characteristics:  
▷
▷
▷
High level of energy recovery when the ac-  
celerator pedal is released.  
Major deceleration when releasing the ac-  
celerator pedal to a standstill of the vehicle.  
The vehicle does not drive off when the  
brake pedal is released.  
124  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Engaging selector lever position P  
Engaging selector lever position N  
NOTICE  
Selector lever position P is automatically en-  
gaged when standby state is switched off.  
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk  
of damage to property. Do not switch off  
standby if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g.,  
in a car wash.  
1. Depress the brake pedal.  
Press the button.  
2. Turn on drive-ready state.  
3. Engage selector lever position N.  
4. Switch off drive-ready state.  
The parking brake is applied and the  
transmission lock is engaged.  
When stopping the vehicle  
In this way, standby state remains switched  
on, and a Check Control message is dis-  
played.  
Selector lever position D or R  
The vehicle can roll.  
On inclines, the system prevents rolling back  
against the set driving direction and provides  
drive-off support.  
Irrespective of standby state, the selector lever  
position P is automatically engaged after ap-  
prox. 35 minutes.  
Selector lever position B  
The system prevents the vehicle from rolling  
away when the vehicle has come to a standstill  
and the accelerator pedal is not pressed.  
If the system is not operational, you may not  
be able to change the selector lever position.  
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if  
needed.  
Driving off  
Engage a gear position and step on the accel-  
erator pedal to drive off.  
Electronic unlocking of the  
transmission lock  
The parking brake is released automatically.  
Rolling or pushing the vehicle  
General information  
In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to  
roll without its own drive for a short distance,  
for instance in a car wash or to be pushed.  
General information  
Unlock the transmission lock electroni-  
cally, e.g., to maneuver the vehicle out of a  
hazardous area in the event of a malfunction.  
Before unlocking the transmission lock, secure  
the vehicle against rolling away, for instance  
with a wheel chock.  
Engaging selector lever position N  
1. Quickly press the Start/Stop button three  
times without pressing the brake.  
2. Depress the brake pedal.  
125  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
3. Press the selector lever to position N until  
position N is shown on the selector lever.  
surrounding traffic closely and actively inter-  
vene where appropriate  
An appropriate Check Control message is  
displayed.  
Warning  
4. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous  
area and secure it against rolling away.  
When driving in electric mode, pedestrians  
and other road users might pay less attention  
to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-  
tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and  
actively intervene where appropriate  
Turning off drive-ready state  
Park the vehicle. Noises from the electrical sys-  
tem such as for cooling the high-voltage sys-  
tem might still be audible.  
After stopping the vehicle:  
1. Apply brake and engage the parking brake.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button.  
Warning  
The READY indicator goes out and a signal  
tone sounds.  
Without energy recovery, the braking effect  
of the electric motor is unavailable. The vehi-  
cle could roll further than anticipated. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
age. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.  
Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively  
intervene where appropriate  
The drive-ready state is switched off automat-  
ically if the driver's seat belt is not buckled  
when the driver's door is opened.  
If leaving the vehicle stationary for longer pe-  
riods, follow the instructions in the Mobility  
chapter.  
Additional information:  
Accelerator pedal positions,  
displays  
Service life of the high-voltage battery, long  
stationary periods, and taking the vehicle out  
of service, refer to page 327.  
Driving in detail: eDRIVE  
Safety information  
Warning  
1
Deceleration and recuperative braking  
Rolling  
The braking effect of the electric motor can  
be stronger than for a vehicle with combus-  
tion engine. Abrupt braking and slow-down  
may confuse other road users. There is a  
risk of accident, injury, or property damage.  
Carefully release the accelerator pedal. Ad-  
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
2
3
Acceleration or constant speed: ePOWER  
126  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is moving.  
Deceleration and recuperative  
braking  
Selector lever position B, D or R is set.  
The accelerator pedal is not depressed or  
only slightly depressed.  
Deceleration  
The degree of the deceleration depends on  
the selector lever position, the energy recovery  
setting and the driving situation.  
The energy recovery is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster.  
Additional information:  
Depending on the degree of the deceleration,  
the brake lights will come on without depress-  
ing the brake pedal.  
Power gauge, refer to page 147.  
Energy cannot be recovered in the following  
situations, for instance:  
Deceleration is very pronounced in selector  
lever position B.  
▷
▷
Selector lever position N is engaged.  
While drive stability control systems are ac-  
tive or adjusting the vehicle, even though  
this is not indicated by an indicator light.  
During the deceleration, energy is recovered  
and the high-voltage battery is charged.  
▷
▷
The high-voltage battery is fully charged.  
Reduced deceleration  
When temperature of the high-voltage bat-  
tery is very low or very high.  
Warning  
▷
The drive's operating temperature is too  
high.  
Without energy recovery, the braking effect  
of the electric motor is unavailable. The vehi-  
cle could roll further than anticipated. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
age. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.  
Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively  
intervene where appropriate  
In winter the energy recovery may be tempora-  
rily unavailable after startup.  
Driving situations for energy recovery  
If deceleration is foreseeable while driving, this  
can be used for energy recovery.  
In the event of danger such as with locked  
wheels, energy recovery and thus deceleration  
is reduced in order to prevent unstable driving  
situations.  
The following driving situations may be suita-  
ble for this:  
▷
▷
Decelerating downhill.  
Deceleration before a red traffic light.  
Energy recovery  
Energy recovery is also called recuperation.  
Avoid late or strong braking. Instead, deceler-  
ate the vehicle using energy recovery.  
With energy recovery, the electric motors act  
as alternators when decelerating and convert  
the kinetic energy of the vehicle to electrical  
energy.  
Strength of recuperative braking  
In selector lever position B, the energy recov-  
ery is high and the deceleration is pronounced.  
For driving in selector lever position D, the  
strength of recuperative braking can be ad-  
justed via iDrive.  
The high-voltage battery is recharged in part  
through energy recovery.  
Energy can be recovered if the following condi-  
tions are met:  
127  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Adaptive energy recovery: energy recovery  
and deceleration are automatically adapted  
to the respective driving situation.  
Heavily discharged high-voltage  
battery  
If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis-  
charged while driving, the drive power and  
some comfort features are reduced incremen-  
tally in order to extend the range.  
High energy recovery: the vehicle deceler-  
ates fast, and more energy is returned to  
the high-voltage battery.  
▷
▷
Average energy recovery.  
Heated high-voltage battery  
Low energy recovery: the vehicle deceler-  
ates more slowly, and less energy is re-  
turned to the high-voltage battery.  
With a stationary vehicle  
Additional information:  
In isolated cases, when the vehicle is station-  
ary, it is possible for the high-voltage battery to  
overheat, for instance at extreme outside tem-  
peratures and in direct sunlight. Drive-ready  
state cannot be turned on if the high-voltage  
battery is overheated.  
Adaptive recuperation, recuperative braking,  
refer to page 309.  
Setting the strength of energy recovery  
1.  
Apps menu  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
2. "Vehicle"  
Another message will indicate when drive-  
ready state is available again.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"  
5. "Energy recovery in D"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
While driving  
If the high-voltage battery overheats while  
driving, the drive power is reduced incremen-  
tally in order to cool down the high-voltage  
battery. The ePOWER power gauge in the in-  
strument cluster decreases.  
What to do if high-voltage battery is  
fully charged  
If the high-voltage battery is fully charged, the  
electric motor will be unable to recover addi-  
tional energy when driving off. To maintain the  
usual level of deceleration from energy recov-  
ery, the vehicle is decelerated by its normal  
brake when the accelerator pedal is released.  
This can cause the brake to overheat in certain  
situations, e.g., when driving downhill or apply-  
ing continuous, gentle braking.  
If the temperature increases further, park  
the vehicle until the high-voltage battery has  
cooled down.  
If the power gauge falls to 0, the drive-ready  
state is switched off and the vehicle comes to a  
stop.  
iX M60: Launch Control  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
As such, the driver must apply the brake when  
driving on long downhill stretches with a fully  
charged high-voltage battery.  
Principle  
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration  
on roads with good traction under dry sur-  
rounding conditions.  
If necessary, adjust your charging strategy,  
e.g., do not fully charge the high-voltage bat-  
tery before driving downhill.  
128  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Using Launch Control causes premature com-  
ponent wear since this function represents a  
very heavy load for the vehicle.  
My Modes  
Principle  
My Modes influence vehicle handling and the  
customizable effects for the overall experience  
inside the vehicle.  
If used frequently over the service life of the ve-  
hicle, the torque from Launch Control will pos-  
sibly be reduced in order to reduce component  
wear.  
The vehicle can be adapted depending on the  
situation using the various My Modes.  
Do not turn the steering wheel when driving off  
with Launch Control.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
systems are affected, for instance:  
Do not use Launch Control when breaking in  
the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Drivetrain.  
Break-in, refer to page 304.  
Steering.  
Chassis.  
Driving off with Launch Control  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
Cruise control.  
Display in the instrument cluster.  
Comfort features in the vehicle interior.  
BMW IconicSounds.  
2. Activate drive mode: "SPORT".  
3. Enabling the driving dynamics setting:  
"SPORT PLUS".  
4. With the left foot, press down forcefully on  
the brake.  
Overview  
5. Engage forward gear.  
Button in the vehicle  
6. Press the accelerator pedal all the way  
down and hold.  
The Launch Control information is dis-  
played in the instrument cluster and the ve-  
hicle begins to vibrate.  
7. Release the brake within a few seconds of  
the Launch Control information illuminating.  
The vehicle accelerates.  
Launch Control stays on as long as the  
Launch Control information is displayed  
and the accelerator pedal is not released.  
My Modes  
129  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
More My Modes  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, more My  
Modes are available that change the ambiance  
in the vehicle interior:  
If applicable, the driving mode  
selected is displayed on the in-  
strument cluster.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Expressive Mode.  
Digital Art Mode.  
Relax Mode.  
My Modes in detail  
Silent Mode.  
General information  
Various My Modes are available depending on  
vehicle equipment.  
Selecting My Modes  
1.  
Press the button.  
My Modes that influence the handling charac-  
teristics are also referred to as driving mode.  
2. "Switch mode"  
3. Select the desired mode.  
Personal Mode  
Driving mode for comfort oriented settings.  
Configuring My Modes  
Some modes can be configured individually.  
Sport Mode  
Driving mode for increased agility of the vehi-  
cle.  
1.  
Press the button.  
Individual settings, e.g., for driving dynamics,  
chassis, and drive system, can be configured  
as needed.  
2. Select mode.  
3. "Settings"  
4. Select the desired settings.  
"SPORT PLUS": Under Driving Dynamics, this  
setting deactivates Dynamic Stability Control,  
thus limiting driving stability.  
Changing the start mode  
Some modes can be set as the start mode.  
▷
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to  
page 209.  
The set start mode activates when drive-ready  
state is turned on.  
▷
Setting for increased driving dynamics, re-  
fer to page 210.  
1.  
Press the button.  
Efficient Mode  
Drive mode for tuning with optimized energy  
consumption and anticipatory display.  
2. Select mode.  
3. "Settings"  
4. "Start mode"  
Additional information:  
Efficient mode, refer to page 310.  
Max Range, refer to page 312.  
130  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
My Modes Design  
My Programs in detail  
Specific depictions of a mode can be shown on  
the control display under My Modes Design.  
My Pro-  
grams  
Description  
"REAR  
This program creates an at-  
1.  
Press the button.  
SEAT VIEW" mosphere that encourages  
sleep for children in the rear.  
2. "My Modes design"  
Activating/deactivating My  
Programs  
My Programs  
1.  
Apps menu  
Principle  
2. "All apps"  
Various vehicle functions in the vehicle interior  
are adapted to each other in a program.  
3. "REAR SEAT VIEW"  
When a program is selected, for example, the  
interior lighting, climate control, and music se-  
lection are adjusted.  
Parking brake  
Principle  
Safety information  
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-  
cle from rolling away when it is parked.  
Warning  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.  
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened  
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.  
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-  
hicle can be opened from the outside.  
Safety information  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
Warning  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
131  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Warning  
The parking brake is engaged and transmis-  
sion lock is engaged.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
While driving  
Use while driving serves as an emergency  
braking function.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Press and hold the parking brake but-  
ton. The vehicle brakes hard for as long  
as the parking brake button is pressed.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds,  
and the brake lights illuminate.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
The parking brake is engaged and the trans-  
mission lock is set when the vehicle is station-  
ary.  
Overview  
Engaging the parking brake  
automatically  
In some situations, the parking brake is en-  
gaged automatically, e.g., through Automatic  
Hold.  
Button in the vehicle  
Additionally, the system can be set to auto-  
matically engaging the parking brake when the  
drive-ready state is turned off.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"  
5. "Parking brake"  
Parking brake  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Setting the parking brake  
In selector lever position N, the parking brake  
will not be engaged automatically.  
With a stationary vehicle  
Press the parking brake button.  
The LED illuminates.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates red.  
132  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Releasing the parking brake  
After a power interruption  
To reestablish parking brake operability after  
a power interruption, an initialization may be  
required.  
Releasing the parking brake manually  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
1. Turn on standby state.  
2.  
Press the button while pressing on  
the brake pedal.  
2.  
3.  
Press the parking brake button.  
The LED and the indicator light go out.  
The parking brake is released.  
Press the parking brake button  
again after 2 seconds.  
The transmission lock remains engaged  
until a gear position is selected.  
The Check Control messages for the park-  
ing brake go out.  
Releasing the parking brake  
automatically  
The parking brake is released automatically  
when you drive off.  
Possible function-related noises are nor-  
mal.  
The indicator light indicates that the  
parking brake is ready for operation  
again.  
The LED and the indicator light go out.  
Using the parking brake via iDrive  
The parking brake can also be engaged or dis-  
engaged via iDrive. Additionally, further infor-  
mation is displayed.  
Automatic Hold  
Principle  
1.  
Apps menu  
Automatic Hold assists the driver by automat-  
ically applying and releasing the brake, for ex-  
ample, in stop-and-go traffic.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"  
5. "Parking brake"  
When a gear position is engaged, the vehicle  
is automatically held in place when it is station-  
ary.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehi-  
cle from rolling back when driving off.  
Malfunction  
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, se-  
cure the vehicle so that it does not roll away  
before you exit.  
General information  
The parking brake is automatically engaged  
under the following conditions:  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
▷
▷
If drive-ready state is turned off.  
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in-  
stance with a wheel chock, after getting out of  
the vehicle.  
The driver’s door is open for more than one  
second and no pedal is pressed during this  
time.  
▷
If the parking brake is used to brake the  
vehicle to a stop while driving.  
133  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
In selector lever position N, Automatic Hold is  
temporarily deactivated.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
Safety information  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
Automatic Hold  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Activating Automatic Hold  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
2.  
Press the button.  
The LED illuminates.  
The indicator light illuminates green.  
Automatic Hold is activated.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
After every vehicle restart, the last se-  
lected setting is active.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle  
Automatic Hold is activated and the driver’s  
door is closed.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
After stopping, the vehicle is automat-  
ically secured against rolling away as  
soon as the indicator light illuminates  
green.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
Driving off  
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.  
The brake is released automatically and the  
indicator light of the parking brake is no longer  
illuminated.  
134  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Automatic parking brake application  
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-  
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is  
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle  
is exited.  
The indicator light changes from green  
to red.  
The parking brake is not set automatically if  
the drive-ready state was switched off while  
the vehicle was coasting. Automatic Hold is  
temporarily deactivated in this case.  
Deactivate Automatic Hold  
Press the button.  
The LED goes out.  
The indicator light goes out.  
Automatic Hold is switched off.  
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,  
also press on the brake pedal when switching  
off.  
135  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Overview  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Instrument cluster  
Principle  
The instrument cluster comprises various digi-  
tal displays, e.g., a speedometer, time, range,  
temperature as well as indicator and warning  
lights.  
Instrument cluster  
Display ranges on the instrument  
cluster  
General information  
The layout of the instrument cluster adapts to  
the respective driving mode. The positions of  
some displays may vary, e.g., the selector lever  
display.  
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster  
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's  
Manual.  
1
Speedometer  
Safety information  
2
Driver assistance systems 213  
Parking assistance systems 239  
Driver Attention Camera 207  
Check Control 139  
Warning  
3
4
If the driving information displays on the in-  
strument cluster fail, e.g., the speedometer,  
do not use the vehicle. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Imme-  
diately park the vehicle in a safe manner.  
Turning drive-ready state off and on again  
may correct the malfunction, allowing you to  
continue driving. If the malfunction cannot be  
corrected, have the vehicle checked by an au-  
Selector lever display 123  
Selection lists 146  
Efficiency trainer 311  
Power gauge 147  
5
6
7
Range 148  
Selector lever position 123  
136  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Select the menu by tilting the knurled wheel  
on the steering wheel where applicable.  
Outside temperature 149  
Charging screen 149  
8
9
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled  
wheel on the steering wheel.  
Central display range 150  
My Modes drive mode 129  
10 Speed Limit Info 213  
Speed Limit Assistant 234  
11 Time 153  
Settings  
Specific displays can be configured individu-  
ally, e.g., a second actual speed.  
12 High-voltage battery charge state indicator  
1.  
Apps menu  
153  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Displays"  
Additional information:  
4. "Instrument cluster"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 140.  
Operating elements on the steering  
wheel  
Live Vehicle  
Operating Function  
element  
Principle  
Live Vehicle is a virtual representation of your  
own vehicle with different information, e.g., ve-  
hicle status or energy flow indicators.  
Display the menu bar on the in-  
strument cluster.  
Turn knurled wheel: scroll selec-  
tion up or down.  
General information  
Tilt knurled wheel in corre-  
sponding direction: Move selec-  
tion to left or right.  
Appropriate information is shown on the con-  
trol display depending on the driving situation.  
Fault statuses are not taken into account.  
Press knurled wheel: confirm  
selection.  
Adaptive content  
The following content is displayed in alternat-  
ing order and, if necessary, depending on the  
selected drive mode:  
Configuring the layout  
In Personal Mode drive mode, the layout in  
the instrument cluster can be individually con-  
figured and displayed.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle status, refer to page 154.  
Current driving condition, refer to page 155.  
Sport displays, refer to page 155.  
Efficiency trainer, refer to page 311.  
Trip data, refer to page 151.  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
Static information  
The following information may be shown per-  
manently on the control display regardless of  
the driving situation and driving mode set.  
2. "LAYOUT"  
137  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Vehicle status.  
Trip data.  
Overview  
Adjusting the display  
In the Live Vehicle menu, you can choose be-  
tween an adaptive display and static content.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Live Vehicle"  
4. "Content"  
Head-up display views are projected onto the  
windshield through a protective glass. The pro-  
tective glass is located between the steering  
wheel and windshield.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
BMW Head-up display  
Displayable information  
The following information is displayed on the  
Head-up display:  
Principle  
The Head-up display projects important infor-  
mation, e.g., speed, onto the windshield in the  
driver's field of view. Information can be re-  
corded without you having to look away from  
the road.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle speed.  
Navigation instructions.  
Check Control messages.  
Sport displays.  
The steering wheel buttons can be used to  
configure various views for the Head-up dis-  
play. Additional settings can be changed on  
the control display, e.g., brightness or height.  
Efficiency trainer.  
Lists and messages.  
Driver assistance systems.  
Some of this information is only displayed  
briefly as needed.  
General information  
Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up  
display in the Vehicle Care chapter.  
Configuring a view  
The views for the Head-up display can be set  
independently of the display on the instrument  
cluster, e.g., a reduced view.  
Additional information:  
Caring for special components, refer to  
page 375.  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
2. "HEAD-UP"  
138  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Select the menu by tilting the knurled wheel  
on the steering wheel where applicable.  
Special windshield  
The windshield is part of the system.  
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled  
wheel on the steering wheel.  
The shape and coating of the special wind-  
shield enable the system to function.  
If damaged, have the special windshield re-  
placed by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
Turning the Head-up display on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Displays"  
Check Control  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Head-up display"  
Principle  
The Check Control system monitors functions  
in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the  
monitored systems.  
Settings  
Individual settings can be entered for the  
Head-up display such as for the height, bright-  
ness or illustration. In addition, individual dis-  
plays in the Head-up display can be set up  
separately such as for Driver Assistance.  
A Check Control message is displayed as  
a combination of indicator lights or warning  
lights and text messages on the instrument  
cluster and, if applicable, on the Head-up dis-  
play. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound  
and a text message may appear on the control  
display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Displays"  
Some Check Control messages are hidden au-  
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds, but they  
will be stored. Stored Check Control messages  
can be displayed on the control display. Urgent  
Check Control messages are permanently dis-  
played but may be hidden temporarily.  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Visibility of the display  
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up  
display is influenced by the following factors:  
Hiding Check Control messages  
▷
▷
Seat position.  
Permanently displayed Check Control mes-  
sages can be hidden temporarily. These mes-  
sages are automatically displayed again after  
approx. 8 seconds.  
Objects on the Head-up display's protective  
glass.  
▷
Dust or dirt on the Head-up display's pro-  
tective glass.  
An arrow icon next to the Check Control  
message indicates whether the Check Control  
message can be hidden.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Windshield dirty on inside or outside.  
Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.  
Wet road.  
To hide Check Control messages, tilt  
the knurled wheel on the steering  
wheel to the left.  
Unfavorable light conditions.  
If the image is distorted, have the basic set-  
tings checked by an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
139  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Displaying stored Check Control  
messages  
Additional information such as the cause of a  
fault or the required action can be called up via  
Check Control.  
Indicator lights and warning  
lights  
Principle  
The indicator lights and the warning lights on  
the instrument cluster show the status of some  
functions in the vehicle. The indicator lights  
and warning lights indicate faults in monitored  
systems.  
Depending on the Check Control message, fur-  
ther help can be selected.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Vehicle status"  
General information  
Indicator lights and warning lights can illumi-  
nate in a variety of combinations and colors.  
4. "Check Control"  
5. Select the desired text message.  
Several of the lights are checked for proper  
functioning and illuminate temporarily when  
drive-ready state is turned on.  
Display  
A Check Control message is displayed in the  
instrument cluster as a text message with an  
icon.  
Red lights  
For urgent messages, an added text is auto-  
matically displayed on the control display.  
Seat belt reminder  
If several faults occur at once, the messages  
are displayed consecutively.  
Seat belt on the driver's seat is not  
buckled.  
Certain messages displayed while driving are  
displayed again after drive-ready state is  
switched off.  
Additional information:  
Seat belt reminder, refer to page 109.  
Icons in the instrument cluster indicate  
an active or saved Check Control mes-  
sage.  
Airbag system  
Warning light illuminates briefly: Indi-  
cates that the entire airbag system and  
seat belt tensioners are operational  
when drive-ready state is switched on.  
Warning light does not illuminate or illuminates  
continuously: the airbag system or the seat  
belt tensioners may not be operational. Have  
the vehicle checked immediately by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Airbags, refer to page 171.  
140  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a person, e.g., a pe-  
destrian or a cyclist. Immediately initiate brak-  
ing or an evasive maneuver.  
Parking brake  
The parking brake is set.  
Additional information:  
Parking brake, refer to page 131.  
Additional information:  
Warning function for pedestrians, refer to  
page 182.  
Brake system  
The brake pads are worn or there is  
another issue with the brake system.  
Forward Collision Warning  
The braking assistance may not be op-  
erational. A higher pedal force may be  
required for the braking process.  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion, e.g., with a vehicle, is detected.  
Increased awareness is required.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a vehicle detected.  
Immediately initiate braking or an evasive ma-  
neuver.  
Additional information:  
System fault  
Warning function in rear-end collision situa-  
tions, refer to page 179.  
Contact an authorized service center or  
another qualified service center or re-  
pair shop.  
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle  
detected from the right  
Emergency Stop Assistant  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion with vehicle crossing from the right  
detected. Increased awareness is re-  
quired.  
The Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-  
gered.  
Additional information:  
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 199.  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a crossing vehicle  
detected. Immediately initiate braking or an  
evasive maneuver.  
Risk of collision  
Warning light illuminates or flashes in  
conjunction with an acoustic signal if  
there is risk of imminent collision.  
Additional information:  
Warning function at intersections, refer to  
page 183.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 176.  
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle  
detected from the left  
Pedestrian Warning  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion with vehicle crossing from the left  
detected. Increased awareness is re-  
quired.  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion with a person, e.g., a pedestrian  
or a cyclist. Increased awareness is re-  
quired.  
141  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a crossing vehicle  
detected. Immediately initiate braking or an  
evasive maneuver.  
The system reduces the speed to a standstill if  
applicable.  
It is possible that the system will not execute  
any supporting steering movements.  
Additional information:  
Immediately grasp the steering wheel with  
your hands and pay attention to the surround-  
ing traffic.  
Warning function at intersections, refer to  
page 183.  
Additional information:  
Distance Control  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 226.  
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-  
nal sounds: Brake and evade as neces-  
sary.  
Yellow lights  
Additional information:  
Antilock Braking System  
Distance Control, refer to page 219.  
The system may not be operational.  
The Antilock Braking System is not  
available.  
Assisted Driving Mode  
The ability to steer may be restricted  
during full braking.  
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-  
nal sounds:  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
The system is switched off or will be  
interrupted very soon.  
Warning light illuminates and acoustic signal  
sounds:  
Additional information:  
Antilock Braking System, refer to page 209.  
The driver's line of sight is not directed at the  
surrounding traffic. System interruption is im-  
minent. The system reduces the speed to a  
standstill if applicable. It is possible that the  
system will not execute any supporting steer-  
ing movements.  
Assisted Driving Mode  
Warning light illuminates and acoustic  
signal sounds: A system interruption is  
imminent.  
Additional information:  
Warning light flashes: A lane boundary has  
been crossed.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 226.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode: Hands are not  
on steering wheel  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 226.  
Warning light illuminates and acoustic  
signal sounds:  
Assisted Driving Mode: Hands are not  
on steering wheel  
The hands are not on the steering  
wheel or, depending on the vehicle equipment  
and national-market version, the driver's line of  
sight is not directed at the surrounding traffic.  
System interruption is imminent.  
Hands are not grasping the steering  
wheel. The system is still active.  
Grab the steering wheel with your  
hands.  
Additional information:  
142  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 226.  
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid  
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.  
Additional information:  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Flat tire monitor, refer to page 348.  
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control is regulating the driving and  
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.  
Reduce the vehicle speed and adjust your driv-  
ing style to the road conditions.  
Tire pressure monitor  
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or  
tire pressure loss has been detected.  
Follow the information in the Check  
Control message.  
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability  
Control has malfunctioned or is initializing.  
Driving stabilization is restricted or has failed.  
Warning light flashes then illuminates continu-  
ously: Flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot  
be detected.  
If the warning light illuminates continuously,  
have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Fault caused by systems or devices with  
the same radio frequency: after leaving the  
area of the interference, the system auto-  
matically becomes active again.  
Additional information:  
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 209.  
In the case of tires with special appro-  
val: the tire pressure monitor was unable  
to complete the reset. Reset the system  
again.  
The Dynamic Stability Control limited  
or increased driving dynamics  
activated  
Wheel without wheel electronics installed:  
Have it checked by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop as needed.  
Dynamic Stability Control is restricted  
or enhanced driving dynamics is acti-  
vated.  
"SPORT PLUS" is activated.  
Additional information:  
Malfunction: have the vehicle checked by  
an authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
▷
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to  
page 209.  
Additional information:  
▷
Setting for increased driving dynamics, re-  
fer to page 210.  
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 342.  
Steering system  
Drive-off support  
The steering system may not be op-  
erational.  
Drive-off support is activated.  
Additional information:  
Have the vehicle checked by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Drive-off support, refer to page 211.  
Additional information:  
Flat tire monitor  
Integral Active Steering, refer to page 212.  
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or  
tire pressure loss has been detected.  
143  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Acoustic pedestrian protection  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
Acoustic pedestrian protection has  
malfunctioned. Increased caution when  
maneuvering.  
Low-beam headlights are switched on  
and the Automatic High Beam Assis-  
tant is activated.  
If malfunctioning repeatedly, have the vehicle  
checked by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
High-beam headlights are switched on and  
off automatically depending on the traffic sit-  
uation.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Acoustic pedestrian protection, refer to  
page 122.  
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to  
page 158.  
Charging capacity limited  
Lane departure warning  
Additional information:  
Depending on vehicle equipment and  
national-market version:  
Charge vehicle, refer to page 314.  
Indicator light flashes: the system is  
performing a steering intervention.  
Green lights  
Additional information:  
Lane departure warning, refer to page 187.  
Turn signal  
Turn signal is on.  
Automatic Hold: vehicle is held  
automatically  
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator  
light indicates that a turn signal bulb  
has failed.  
Automatic Hold is ready to use. The  
vehicle is automatically held in place  
when it is stationary.  
Additional information:  
Turn signal, refer to page 157.  
Additional information:  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 133.  
Parking lights  
Parking lights are switched on.  
Additional information:  
Automatic Hold: vehicle secured  
against rolling away  
Parking lights, low-beam headlights,  
refer to page 160.  
The vehicle is automatically secured  
against rolling away after stopping.  
Additional information:  
Low-beam headlights  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 133.  
Low-beam headlights are switched on.  
Additional information:  
Cruise Control  
Parking lights, low-beam headlights,  
refer to page 160.  
The system is active.  
Additional information:  
Cruise control, refer to page 217.  
144  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 229.  
Distance Control  
Indicator light illuminates: Vehicle has  
been detected ahead of you. The vehi-  
cle icon goes out if no vehicle has been  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
The system is active.  
Additional information:  
detected ahead of you.  
Indicator light flashes: Preceding vehicle has  
driven off.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 231.  
Additional information:  
Distance Control, refer to page 219.  
Blue lights  
Speed Limit Assist  
High-beam headlights  
The detected speed limit can be ap-  
plied with the SET button. As soon as  
the speed limit has been applied, a  
green checkmark is displayed.  
High-beam headlights have been  
switched on.  
Additional information:  
High-beam headlights, refer to page 157.  
Additional information:  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 234.  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
High-beam headlights are switched on  
via the Automatic High Beam Assis-  
tant.  
Assisted Driving Mode  
The system supports the driver in  
keeping the vehicle within the lane.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to  
page 158.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 226.  
Lane Change Assistant: lane change in  
progress  
Gray lights  
Arrow icon for lane change green: the  
system carries out a lane change.  
Seat belt reminder  
Seat belt on the passenger seat or an-  
other seat in the vehicle is not buckled.  
Additional information:  
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 229.  
Additional information:  
Seat belts, refer to page 108.  
Lane Change Assistant: lane change  
not possible  
Distance Control  
Gray line for lane boundary on the ap-  
propriate side: system detected a lane  
change request. Lane change not cur-  
rently possible.  
Indicator light flashes: Conditions are  
not adequate for the system to work.  
The system was deactivated but ap-  
plies the brakes until you actively resume con-  
trol by pressing on the brake pedal or accelera-  
tor pedal.  
Additional information:  
145  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Selection lists  
Distance Control, refer to page 219.  
Principle  
Assisted Driving Mode  
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used  
for certain functions in the instrument cluster or  
the Head-up display.  
The system is on standby and does not  
manipulate steering movements.  
▷
▷
▷
Entertainment source.  
System activates automatically as soon  
as all function conditions are fulfilled.  
Current audio source.  
Additional information:  
List of most recent telephone calls.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 226.  
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open  
on the control display.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
Displaying and using the list  
The selection lists can be displayed and op-  
erated using the operating elements on the  
steering wheel.  
The system is interrupted and will acti-  
vate automatically as soon as all func-  
tional requirements are met.  
Additional information:  
Operating Function  
elements  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to page 231.  
Change the entertainment  
source.  
White lights  
Pressing the button again will  
close the currently displayed list.  
Cruise Control with Distance Control  
No Distance Control because accelera-  
tor pedal is being pressed.  
Show list of most recent tele-  
phone calls.  
Additional information:  
Distance Control, refer to page 219.  
Turn the knurled wheel: display  
the list for currently selected en-  
tertainment source or scroll up  
or down in the list.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
The system can be activated.  
Additional information:  
Tilt knurled wheel in corre-  
sponding direction: Move selec-  
tion to left or right.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 231.  
Press knurled wheel: confirm  
selection.  
146  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Display  
Power gauge  
Principle  
The power gauge indicates the current electric  
drive power as a percentage.  
Display  
Selection lists, e.g., entertainment sources, are  
displayed on the instrument cluster.  
Example: selecting a radio station  
1.  
Press the entertainment sources  
Needle in the area of arrow 1: display of the  
energy recovered by coasting or when deceler-  
ating.  
button.  
2.  
To switch to the list of radio sta-  
tions, tilt the knurled wheel to the right.  
Needle near arrow 2: Drive power in percent.  
3. Turn the knurled wheel to select a radio  
station.  
Energy recovery display  
4. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-  
lected radio station.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Low energy recovery.  
Example: changing the entertainment  
source  
Selector lever position D is en-  
gaged.  
Average energy recovery.  
1.  
Press the entertainment sources  
Selector lever position D is en-  
gaged.  
button.  
High energy recovery.  
2.  
To select an entertainment source,  
turn the knurled wheel.  
Selector lever position D or B is  
set.  
3. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-  
lected entertainment source.  
Adaptive recuperation is acti-  
vated  
Adaptive recuperation, refer to  
page 309.  
The degree of the energy recovery depends on  
the settings for the energy recovery.  
147  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
When the drive-ready state  
is switched on, READY is dis-  
played in the instrument cluster.  
Driving in detail: eDRIVE, refer to page 126.  
Reduced drive power  
The available power may be reduced due to  
certain factors. The power gauge is automati-  
cally adjusted accordingly.  
Additional information:  
▷
Operating state of the vehicle, refer to  
page 46.  
In addition, the icons on the power gauge indi-  
cate reduced drive power:  
Range  
Icon  
Description  
Blue icon: cold drivetrain.  
General information  
The expected range for the energy stored in  
the high-voltage battery is continuously dis-  
played in the instrument cluster.  
White icon: increased drive sys-  
tem temperature, for instance  
due to sustained or high  
power demand when driving  
on mountain roads.  
Always make sure that the range is sufficient  
for the planned trip. The range is dynamic and  
can abruptly change.  
Depending on vehicle equip-  
ment and national-market ver-  
sion:  
The range can be reduced or increased based  
on the following factors:  
Drive power limitation defined  
via the BMW Digital Key.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Driving style.  
Traffic conditions.  
Heavily discharged high-volt-  
age battery.  
Drive mode change.  
Climate and terrain conditions.  
Automatic climate control settings.  
System-related functional limi-  
tation.  
After determination of a route through the  
navigation system depending on the route  
profile, route distance and selected speed.  
A Check Control message is  
displayed in addition where ap-  
plicable.  
▷
▷
When exiting a route or recalculating a  
route.  
Standby state and drive-  
ready state  
By preheating/precooling the high-voltage  
battery for a DC charging process.  
Information about the current range can be  
displayed in the instrument cluster.  
OFF is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster. Drive-ready state  
is turned off and standby state  
turned on.  
Check Control messages indicate a limited  
range.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Range prediction, refer to page 153.  
Increasing the range, refer to page 309.  
148  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Display  
Outside temperature  
The range is continuously dis-  
played in the instrument cluster.  
General information  
If the indicator drops to +37℉/+3℃ or lower, a  
signal sounds.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.  
Range with active guidance  
The icon is displayed next to the range  
when guidance was started in the navigation  
system. Information from the navigation sys-  
tem is taken into account for the calculation of  
the current range.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃  
there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on  
bridges or shady sections of the road. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
age. Modify your driving style to the weather  
conditions at low temperatures.  
Heavily discharged high-voltage  
battery  
The high-voltage battery is  
heavily discharged. The drive  
power will be reduced. Heating  
and climate control functions will  
be deactivated.  
Charging screen  
In this state, the exact range can no longer be  
calculated. A short range may still be available  
depending on the environmental condition.  
Principle  
The charging screen displays information  
about the charging process in the instrument  
cluster.  
Re-establishing the drive-ready state can help  
increase the range slightly, for instance to re-  
move the vehicle from a hazardous area.  
General information  
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster  
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's  
Manual.  
State of charge in strong  
temperature fluctuations  
In the case of strong temperature fluctuations  
and a low state of charge of the high-voltage  
battery, it may not be possible to start the ve-  
hicle again at the beginning of the next trip.  
Recharge vehicle with a low state of charge in  
time.  
When the vehicle is locked, the most important  
information is displayed for a short period of  
time.  
Display charging screen again:  
With the charging cable plugged in,  
press the button on the vehicle key.  
The function is not available for the first  
10 seconds after locking.  
Additional information:  
149  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Charge vehicle, refer to page 314.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, Aug-  
mented View on the instrument cluster en-  
ables the visualization of driver assistance  
systems on the actual vehicle's surround-  
ings.  
Overview  
Grey lines indicate the recommended min-  
imum distance to the preceding vehicle  
when speed control systems are deacti-  
vated.  
▷
Android Auto©.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, select functions of  
a compatible smartphone can also be dis-  
played, e.g., map views.  
1
Current charging capacity 324  
2
Charge target set 323  
Some contents for the central display range  
can also be configured as a view in the Head-  
up display.  
End of charging time 324  
Set departure time 325  
Departure preconditioning 325  
Current range 324  
3
4
5
Additional information:  
Head-up display, refer to page 138.  
Current state of charge 324  
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
6
Range when reaching the charging desti-  
nation 324  
Configuring the central display  
range  
The content of the central display range on the  
instrument cluster can be configured individu-  
ally, for instance the trip data display.  
7
Charging cable status 316  
8
9
Charging station restriction 314  
Set or maximum current limit 314  
Central display range  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
Displayable content  
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
The following settings can be selected:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Reduced display.  
2. "CONTENT"  
Trip data, refer to page 151.  
Range prediction, refer to page 153.  
Assisted View, refer to page 152.  
Navigation system route preview.  
Navigation system map view.  
G-Meter, refer to page 153.  
Entertainment.  
Select the menu by tilting the knurled wheel  
on the steering wheel where applicable.  
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled  
wheel on the steering wheel.  
Augmented View.  
150  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Information on energy consumption and dis-  
tance covered can be displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster.  
Trip data  
Principle  
The trip data display provides various informa-  
tion about the trip, e.g., average energy con-  
sumption or trip distance.  
General information  
The trip data can be displayed on the control  
display and in the instrument cluster.  
Depending on the setting in the Live Vehicle  
menu, the trip data is shown on the control  
display.  
▷
▷
▷
Current energy consumption, arrow 1.  
Average energy consumption, arrow 2.  
The values can be displayed and reset de-  
pending on different intervals.  
Distance traveled depending on the config-  
ured interval, arrow 3.  
Display on the control display  
▷
Total mileage, arrow 4.  
General information  
The following trip data is shown on the control  
display:  
Current energy consumption  
The current energy consumption display lets  
you check your current energy consumption,  
e.g., to drive efficiently.  
▷
▷
Configured interval for displaying trip data.  
Average energy consumption depend-  
ing on the set interval.  
Average energy consumption  
The average energy consumption is deter-  
mined on the basis of various distances.  
▷
▷
▷
Travel time depending on the config-  
ured interval.  
Distance traveled depending on the  
configured interval.  
Adjusting the display of the trip data  
The intervals for the display of the trip data  
in the instrument cluster and on the control  
display are adjustable.  
Counter for energy recovery depend-  
ing on the configured interval.  
Displaying trip data continuously  
1.  
Apps menu  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Live Vehicle"  
4. "Content"  
5. "Trip data"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Time period for trip data"  
5. "Values"  
6. Select the desired setting:  
151  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
"Since start of trip": the values are auto-  
matically reset approx. four hours after  
the vehicle has come to a standstill.  
Assisted View  
Principle  
▷
▷
"Since last charge": the values are auto-  
matically reset after charging.  
With Assisted View, information on driver as-  
sistance systems can be displayed on the in-  
strument cluster with a vehicle animation.  
"Since factory": the values since the  
time of the factory delivery are dis-  
played.  
Information on parking and maneuvering is  
displayed in the Assisted View whenever the  
parking assistance system is active.  
▷
"Since Individual": the values since the  
last manual reset are displayed. The  
values can be reset at any time.  
Safety information  
Resetting average values manually  
The following interval can be reset manually at  
any time:  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
"Since Individual ( )"  
Using the knurled wheel on the steering wheel:  
1. Display trip data in the instrument cluster.  
2. Press and hold the  
knurled wheel  
on the steering wheel until the values are  
reset.  
Via iDrive:  
1. Apps menu  
General  
2. "Vehicle"  
You can configure how Assisted View is dis-  
played on the central display range.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Time period for trip data"  
5. "Reset Individual"  
Additional information:  
Central display area, refer to page 150  
The average values and counters are reset.  
Once the average values and counters have  
been reset, the following interval is automati-  
cally activated:  
Display  
"Since Individual ( )"  
152  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
An example of active Driver Assistance: Indica-  
tor and warning lights for Distance Control and  
Assisted Driving Mode are displayed. At the  
same time, the Distance Control is animated in  
Assisted View.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the time zone can be set or  
automatic time zone enabled. With automatic  
time setting, the time, date and, if necessary,  
the time zone are updated automatically.  
1.  
Apps menu  
System limits  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. Select the desired settings.  
Only objects that are detected by the system  
are taken into account.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 41.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 42.  
State of charge indicator  
Safety information  
Warning  
G-Meter  
General information  
Even when it is indicated that the high-volt-  
age battery is discharged, the high-voltage  
system is always still under high voltage.  
There is a risk of fire or a risk of injury. Do  
not touch or change live parts, e.g., orange  
high-voltage cables, even when the batteries  
are discharged.  
The G-Meter indicates the forces that are ap-  
plied in longitudinal and transverse direction  
on the vehicle occupants while driving.  
The display can be configured on the central  
display range of the instrument cluster.  
The values are automatically reset whenever  
you start a new drive.  
Additional information:  
Display  
Central display area, refer to page 150  
When standby and drive-ready  
state are turned on, the availa-  
ble battery charge state of the  
high-voltage battery is continu-  
ously displayed in percent in the  
instrument cluster.  
Manually reseting G-Meter values  
1. Display the G-Meter on the instrument  
cluster.  
2.  
Press and hold the knurled wheel  
on the steering wheel until the values are  
reset.  
In case of temperature fluctuations, the battery  
charge state may change.  
Range prediction  
Date and time  
Various settings can be applied for the date  
and time display such as the date format.  
Principle  
The range prediction indicates the extent to  
which the range can be influenced with the  
153  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
current driving style. This supports an efficient  
driving style.  
Icon  
Description  
The expected battery charge  
state when the destination is  
reached is displayed next to  
the icon.  
General information  
The current range is influenced by many fac-  
tors, including speed.  
The icon is displayed when  
route guidance to a charging  
post was started on the navi-  
gation system.  
The range trend shows the expected develop-  
ment of the range with the current driving style.  
The range trend is based on the average elec-  
trical consumption that is calculated for the di-  
rectly traveled route section.  
The icon is displayed when  
route guidance was restarted  
on the navigation system. In-  
formation from the navigation  
system is taken into account  
for the calculation of the cur-  
rent range.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Range, refer to page 148.  
Increasing the range, refer to page 309.  
Overview  
Setting the units of  
measurement  
Depending on the national-market version, you  
can set the units of measurement for some  
values, for instance energy consumption, dis-  
tances, and temperature.  
▷
▷
▷
Current range, arrow 1.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Range trend, arrow 2.  
2. "Vehicle"  
Possible range with very low energy con-  
sumption, arrow 3.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Units"  
▷
Possible range with very high energy con-  
sumption, arrow 4.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Range prediction with active  
guidance  
Vehicle status  
With active guidance, the distance to the des-  
tination and the expected charge state of the  
high-voltage battery when the destination is  
reached are also displayed.  
General information  
The status can be displayed and actions per-  
formed for several systems such as for Check  
Control.  
154  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Displaying vehicle status  
Functional requirements  
1.  
Apps menu  
▷
Personal or Efficient driving mode is se-  
lected.  
2. "Vehicle"  
▷
For Live Vehicle, select the following set-  
ting: "Adaptive content".  
3. "Vehicle status"  
Overview  
Display  
Icon  
Description  
"FLAT TIRE MONITOR": Sta-  
tus of the flat tire monitor, refer  
to page 348.  
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status  
of the Tire Pressure Monitor,  
refer to page 342.  
"Check Control": displaying  
stored Check Control mes-  
sages, refer to page 139.  
An example:  
The adaptive recuperation is active, arrow 1.  
The high-voltage battery is charged when the  
vehicle is decelerating, arrow 2.  
"Service": display of the service  
notifications, refer to page 156.  
Current driving condition  
Sport displays  
General information  
The current driving condition is displayed dy-  
namically while driving in the Live Vehicle  
menu on the control display.  
Principle  
The Sport displays especially support a sporty  
driving style.  
Functional requirements  
The following states can be displayed:  
▷
SPORT driving mode is selected.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Driving.  
▷
The following setting is selected for Live  
Vehicle:"Adaptive content"  
Coasting mode: "EFFICIENT COASTING".  
"CHARGING BATTERY"  
Adaptive recuperation.  
Display  
Depending on the situation, additional in-  
formation on adaptive recuperation is dis-  
played.  
The sport displays are displayed in the Live  
Vehicle menu on the control display.  
The following information is displayed:  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Torque.  
Power.  
▷
▷
Adaptive recuperation, refer to page 309.  
Coasting, refer to page 310.  
155  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Speed, electric motor.  
6. "Date:"  
Temperature, electric motor.  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Service  
Principle  
The service notifications indicate recom-  
mended maintenance work.  
General information  
After turning on, the next service appointment  
or the distance remaining until the next servic-  
ing is displayed briefly on the instrument clus-  
ter.  
A service advisor can read out the mainte-  
nance work from the vehicle key.  
Display  
More information may be displayed on the  
control display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Vehicle status"  
4. "Service"  
Maintenance measures as well as legally  
mandated inspections are displayed.  
5. Select the desired entry.  
Entering appointment dates  
Dates for mandatory vehicle inspections can  
be entered.  
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are  
set correctly.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Vehicle status"  
4. "Service"  
5. "Vehicle inspection"  
156  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Light and view  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
5. "One-touch turn signal"  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Brief flashing  
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold  
it there for as long as you want the turn signal  
to flash.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
High-beam headlights,  
headlight flasher  
Turn signal  
Turn signal in exterior mirror  
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.  
When driving and during operation of the turn  
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold  
in the exterior mirrors so that the turn signal  
lamps on the exterior mirror are easy to see.  
Flashing  
▷
▷
High-beam headlights on, arrow 1.  
The high-beam headlights illuminate when  
the low-beam headlights are switched on.  
High-beam headlights off/headlight flasher,  
arrow 2.  
Press the lever past the resistance point.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates when the high-beam  
headlights are turned on.  
One-touch signaling  
Lightly tap the lever up or down.  
The one-touch signaling duration can be ad-  
justed.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
157  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
The blue indicator light in the instru-  
ment cluster illuminates when the sys-  
tem switches on the high-beam head-  
Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
lights.  
Principle  
Interruption of the journey with activated Au-  
tomatic High Beam Assistant: the Automatic  
High Beam Assistant remains activated when  
continuing the journey.  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects  
other road users early on and automatically  
switches the high-beam headlights on or off  
depending on the traffic situation.  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is deacti-  
vated when manually switching the high-beam  
headlights on and off.  
General information  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures  
that the high-beam headlights are switched  
on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the  
low speed range, the high-beam headlights  
are not switched on by the system.  
The system responds to light from oncoming  
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to  
ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cit-  
ies.  
The high-beam headlights can be switched on  
and off manually at any time.  
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis-  
tant, press the turn signal lever up, arrow 1.  
Functional requirements  
Deactivating Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
▷
Automatic headlight control is activated.  
▷
Low-beam headlights are switched on.  
Activating Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. "Additional settings"  
5. "Automatic High Beams"  
Press the turn signal lever forward, arrow 1,  
or pull the turn signal lever backward when  
the high-beam headlights are switched on, ar-  
row 2.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster is illuminated when the low-  
beam headlights are switched on.  
When the Automatic High Beam Assistant is  
deactivated via iDrive, the operation with the  
turn signal lever is not possible.  
The headlights are automatically changed be-  
tween low-beam headlights and high-beam  
headlights.  
158  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
to use the high-beam headlights. When appro-  
priate, dim the high beams manually.  
Sensitivity of the Automatic High  
Beam Assistant  
The system may not be fully operational in  
the following situations, and driver intervention  
may be necessary:  
General information  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam  
Assistant can be adjusted.  
▷
In very unfavorable weather conditions  
such as fog or heavy precipitation.  
Safety information  
▷
When detecting poorly-lit road users such  
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders  
and wagons; when driving close to train or  
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.  
Warning  
If adjustments have been made or the sen-  
sitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic  
may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. If  
adjustments have been made and the sen-  
sitivity has been modified, make sure that  
oncoming traffic is not momentarily blinded.  
Switch off the high-beam headlights man-  
ually if required.  
▷
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,  
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncom-  
ing traffic on highways.  
▷
▷
In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres-  
ence of highly reflective signs.  
When the windshield in the area in front  
of the interior mirror is fogged up, dirty or  
covered with stickers, etc.  
Exterior lighting  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
Setting at standstill only.  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
Light is turned off.  
Overview  
Buttons in the vehicle  
Increasing sensitivity  
Push the turn signal lever to the front for ap-  
proximately 10 seconds.  
A Check Control message is displayed. The  
system responds more sensitively.  
Resetting the sensitivity  
Push the turn signal lever to the front again  
for approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-  
ready state.  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam  
Assistant is reset to the factory settings.  
System limits  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot  
replace the driver's personal judgment of when  
159  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Function  
Icon  
Driving lights automatic  
Exterior lighting menu.  
Principle  
The low-beam headlights are switched on and  
off automatically depending on the ambient  
brightness, for example in tunnels, in twilight  
or if there is precipitation.  
Automatic headlight control.  
Low-beam headlights.  
Exterior lighting off.  
Exterior lighting off.  
General information  
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can  
cause the lights to be turned on.  
If the low-beam headlights are switched on  
manually, the automatic headlight control is  
deactivated.  
Functions via iDrive  
Icon  
Function  
Automatic headlight control.  
Activate automatic headlight control  
Press the button on the light switch.  
Low-beam headlights.  
Parking lights.  
The LED in the button illuminates.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster is illuminated when the low-  
beam headlights are switched on.  
Exterior lighting off.  
System limits  
The automatic headlight control cannot re-  
place your personal judgment of lighting condi-  
tions.  
Left roadside parking light.  
Right roadside parking light.  
For example, the sensors are unable to detect  
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn  
the lights on manually.  
Buttons on the vehicle key  
Parking lights, low-beam  
headlights and roadside  
parking lights  
Icon  
Function  
Interior lighting.  
Parts of the exterior lighting.  
General information  
Pathway lighting.  
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-  
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting  
160  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
is automatically switched off after a period of  
time.  
Low-beam headlights  
Turning on low-beam headlights  
Parking lights  
Press the button on the light switch.  
General information  
The parking lights can only be turned on at low  
speeds.  
The low-beam headlights illuminate when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
Turning on parking lights  
1.  
Apps menu  
Press the button again to switch on the low-  
beam headlights when the standby state is  
switched on.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. "Parking light"  
Turning off low-beam headlights  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
low-beam headlights can be turned off in the  
low speed range:  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.  
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe-  
riods; otherwise, they might drain the vehicle  
battery and it would then be impossible to  
switch on drive-ready state.  
▷
Press the button on the light switch.  
▷
▷
Press and hold the button on the  
light switch.  
Turn off light via iDrive.  
Turning off parking lights  
The following options are available to turn off  
the parking lights:  
Roadside parking lights  
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road-  
side parking light can be switched on.  
▷
▷
Press the button on the light switch.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Press and hold the button on the  
light switch.  
2. "Vehicle"  
▷
▷
Turn off light via iDrive.  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
Turn on drive-ready state.  
4. "Left roadside park. light" or "Right  
roadside park. light"  
After the drive-ready state is switched on,  
the automatic headlight control will be acti-  
vated.  
161  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Welcome Light Carpet  
Welcome lights  
Principle  
The welcome light turns on automatically for  
a limited period of time when approaching or  
unlocking the vehicle.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the exterior  
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.  
The light source is located in the position indi-  
cated.  
Activating/deactivating welcome  
light  
Keep the light source clean and unobstructed.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Pathway lighting  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
Principle  
5. Depending on the equipment, select the  
following setting:  
For the pathway lighting, the exterior lighting  
turns on for a certain period of time after leav-  
ing the vehicle in order to illuminate the area  
surrounding the vehicle.  
▷
"Welcome and goodbye"  
When unlocking the vehicle, individual  
lighting functions are turned on.  
Switching pathway lighting on  
▷
After switching off the drive-ready state,  
briefly push the turn signal lever forward.  
Turning on the welcome light  
▷
Automatically on approach.  
▷
During unlocking.  
▷
Press and hold the button on the  
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.  
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key  
with the vehicle locked.  
Setting the duration  
Depending on the settings, the interior  
lighting and parts of the exterior lighting will  
be turned on.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
The function is not available for the first  
10 seconds after locking.  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
5. "Pathway lighting"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
162  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
The adaptive lighting functions are active  
when the drive-ready state is switched on.  
Daytime driving lights  
General information  
The daytime driving lights illuminate when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
Adaptive Light Control  
General information  
Depending on the steering-wheel angle and  
other parameters, the laser high-beam head-  
lights follow the course of the road.  
Activating/deactivating daytime  
driving lights  
In some countries, daytime driving lights are  
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti-  
vate the daytime driving lights in front.  
Cornering light  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Principle  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous  
roads or when turning, an additional cornering  
light is switched on that illuminates the inside  
of the curve when the vehicle is moving below  
a certain speed.  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
5. Depending on vehicle equipment or na-  
tional-market version:  
▷
▷
"Daytime driving lights"  
"Rear daytime driving lights"  
General information  
The cornering light is automatically switched  
on depending on the steering-wheel angle or,  
where applicable, the use of turn signals.  
Adaptive lighting functions  
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights  
may be automatically switched on regardless  
of the steering-wheel angle.  
Principle  
Adaptive lighting functions enable dynamic il-  
lumination of the road.  
General information  
The adaptive lighting functions may consist of  
one system or multiple systems, depending on  
the equipment version:  
Adaptive headlight range  
control  
The adaptive headlight range control feature  
balances out acceleration and braking proc-  
esses as well as the vehicle load conditions in  
order to avoid blinding oncoming traffic.  
▷
▷
Adaptive Light Control.  
Cornering light.  
Activating the adaptive lighting  
functions  
Press the button on the light switch.  
The LED in the button illuminates.  
163  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Laser high-beam headlights  
Principle  
The headlight range of the high-beam head-  
lights is increased and provides better illumi-  
nation of the road.  
General information  
The laser high-beam headlights are integrated  
into the headlights and emit from there.  
The info label is located on the headlight and is  
visible when the hood is open.  
When the high-beam headlights are turned  
on, starting with a speed of approx.  
37 mph/60 km/h, the laser high-beam head-  
lights are automatically turned on in addition to  
the LED high-beam headlights.  
Instrument lighting  
Functional requirement  
The brightness can only be adjusted in dark-  
ness and with turned on parking lights or low-  
beam headlights.  
Depending on the national-market version, ad-  
ditional information can be taken from the la-  
ser sign on the headlight.  
Safety information  
Setting the brightness  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Cockpit brightness at night"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Interior lighting  
The sign is in the headlight and is visible from  
the outside.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, interior  
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient  
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically  
controlled.  
164  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read-  
ing lights are located next to the interior lights  
in the front and rear.  
Overview  
Via iDrive:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Reading light"  
5. Tap the desired seat.  
The brightness of the reading lights can be  
adjusted when they are turned on.  
Interior lighting menu  
Reading lights  
Interior lights  
Ambient light  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, lighting  
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's  
interior.  
Turning interior lights on/off  
Using the button:  
Activating/deactivating ambient  
light  
Press the button.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
To switch off permanently: press the button  
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Ambient lighting"  
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle  
can be switched on and off independently. The  
button is located in the rear headliner.  
Via iDrive:  
Turning ambient light on/off  
The ambient light is switched on when the ve-  
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the  
vehicle is locked.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Reading light"  
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,  
it will not be turned on when the vehicle is  
unlocked.  
5.  
Tap on the icon.  
Turning reading lights on/off  
Using the button:  
Press the button.  
165  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Selecting the color  
The color of the ambient light can only be se-  
lected in Personal Mode.  
Speaker lighting  
Principle  
1.  
Apps menu  
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.  
2. "Vehicle"  
General information  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Color"  
When the speakers are muted, the speaker  
lighting is turned off. When the ambient light-  
ing effects are enabled, the speakers illuminate  
white.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Setting the brightness  
Turning speaker lighting on/off  
The speaker lighting is switched on when the  
vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when the  
vehicle is locked.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Background light" or "Accent lighting"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Window wiper system  
Safety information  
Warning  
Dynamic light  
Individual actions, for example incoming calls  
or opened doors, are indicated by light effects.  
If the ambient light is disabled, the light effects  
are still displayed.  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off  
when the wipers are in the folded-away state  
and the wipers are folded in when switching  
on.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Lighting effects"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
NOTICE  
Reduced for night drive  
The wiper blades can wear out or become  
damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry  
window for a longer period of time. The wiper  
motor can overheat. There is a risk of dam-  
age to property. Do not use the wipers when  
the window is dry.  
Some lights of the interior lighting are reduced  
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Reduced for night driving"  
166  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Turning off the window wiper  
system and flick wipe  
NOTICE  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,  
the wiper blades can be torn off and the  
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost  
the windshield prior to switching the wipers  
on.  
Turning on window wiper system  
Press the lever down or forward.  
▷
Turning off: press the lever down, arrow 1,  
until it reaches the 0 position.  
▷
Flick wipe: press the lever down from the  
0 position, arrow 1, and press the lever in  
position 0 or position 1 forward, arrow 2.  
The lever returns to its initial position when  
released.  
Press the lever up until the desired position is  
reached.  
Rain sensor  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Rest position of the wipers, position 0.  
Rain sensor mode, position 1.  
Normal wiper speed, position 2.  
Fast wiper speed, position 3.  
Principle  
The rain sensor automatically controls the  
wiper operation depending on the intensity of  
the rainfall.  
When the journey is interrupted with the win-  
dow wiper system turned on: when the journey  
continues, the wipers resume at their previous  
speed.  
General information  
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-  
rectly in front of the interior mirror.  
The wiper speed can be reduced gradually to  
protect the wiper motor from overheating.  
Safety information  
NOTICE  
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers  
can accidentally start moving in car washes.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti-  
vate the rain sensor in car washes.  
167  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Activating rain sensor  
Window washer system  
Safety information  
Warning  
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window  
at low temperatures and obstruct the view.  
There is a risk of accident. Only use the win-  
dow washer system when the washer fluid  
will not freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-  
freeze, if needed.  
Press lever up once from the 0 position, ar-  
row 1.  
Wiping operation is started.  
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.  
NOTICE  
In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not  
start.  
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,  
the washer pump cannot work as intended.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Do  
not use the washer system when the washer  
fluid reservoir is empty.  
Deactivating rain sensor  
Press lever back into the 0 position.  
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity  
Cleaning the windshield  
Turn the knurled wheel to adjust the sensitivity  
of the rain sensor.  
Pull the lever.  
The washer fluid is sprayed onto the wind-  
shield directly in front of the wiper blade when  
the wipers move up and down.  
▷
▷
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.  
Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.  
Windshield washer nozzles  
The windshield washer nozzles are automati-  
cally heated while standby state is switched  
on.  
168  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Rear wiper  
Switching on the rear wiper  
Warning  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off  
when the wipers are in the folded-away state  
and the wipers are folded in when switching  
on.  
Turn the outer switch upward.  
NOTICE  
▷
▷
Resting position of wiper, position 0.  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,  
the wiper blades can be torn off and the  
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost  
the windshield prior to switching the wipers  
on.  
Intermittent operation, arrow 1. When re-  
verse gear is engaged, the system switches  
to continuous operation.  
Clean the rear window  
Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.  
▷
In rest position: Turn the switch downward,  
arrow 3. The switch returns to its rest posi-  
tion when released.  
▷
In intermittent operation: turn the switch  
further, arrow 2. The switch automatically  
returns to its interval position when re-  
leased.  
The function is deactivated if the washer fluid  
reservoir fill level is low.  
Fold-out position of the wipers  
Principle  
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be  
folded out from the windshield, which is impor-  
tant, for instance, when changing the wiper  
blades or for folding away under frosty condi-  
tions.  
169  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Folding out the wipers  
1. Turn on standby state.  
2. Push the wiper lever down or forward and  
hold it until the wipers stop in an approxi-  
mately vertical position.  
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the  
windshield.  
Folding in the wipers  
1. Fold the wipers back in onto the windshield.  
2. Turn on standby state, then press the wiper  
lever down or forward again and hold it.  
Wipers return to their rest position and are  
ready again for operation.  
170  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Vehicle features and options  
Additional information:  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Airbags  
1
Front airbag, driver  
Front airbag, front passenger  
Head airbag  
4
5
Side airbag  
Knee airbag  
2
3
Front airbags  
Side airbag  
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag  
protects the side of the body in the chest and  
lap area.  
The front airbag helps protect the driver and  
front passenger in the event of a frontal impact  
in which the seat belts alone would not provide  
adequate protection.  
Depending on the national-market version:  
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag  
in the rear protects the chest and lap area on  
171  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
the side of the bodies of the occupants in the  
outer rear seats.  
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep the  
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low  
as possible when the airbag is deployed.  
Head airbag  
In the event of a side collision, the head airbag  
protects the head.  
▷
▷
Adjust seat and steering wheel so that  
hands can be crossed over the steering  
wheel. Select the settings so that the  
shoulder rests against the backrest when  
crossing the hands and the upper body  
is as far back as possible while still main-  
taining a comfortable grip on the steering  
wheel.  
Ejection Mitigation  
The head airbag system is designed as an  
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce  
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants  
through side windows during rollovers or side  
collision events.  
Make sure that the front passenger is sit-  
ting correctly, i.e., with their feet and legs in  
the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.  
▷
▷
Make sure that occupants keep their heads  
away from the side airbag.  
Knee airbag  
Depending on the national-market version:  
There should be no additional persons, an-  
imals or objects between an airbag and a  
person.  
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event  
of a frontal impact.  
▷
▷
Dashboard and windshield on the pas-  
senger's side must stay clear - do not at-  
tach adhesive film or coverings and do not  
attach brackets or cables, for instance for  
navigation devices or mobile phones.  
Protective effect  
General information  
Airbags are not deployed in every impact sit-  
uation, e.g., in less severe accidents.  
Do not bond the airbag cover panels with  
adhesive, do not cover them or modify  
them in any way.  
Information on optimum protective  
effect of the airbags  
▷
▷
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on  
the passenger's side as a storage area.  
Warning  
Keep storage compartments near the air-  
bags closed, e.g., glove compartment or  
center armrest.  
If the seat position is incorrect, the seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly or the deploy-  
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the  
airbag system cannot provide protection as  
intended and may cause additional injuries  
due to deployment. There is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Follow the information on  
achieving the optimum protective effect of the  
airbag system.  
▷
Do not place slip covers, seat cushions,  
or other objects on the front seats unless  
they are specifically designed for seats with  
integrated airbags.  
▷
▷
Do not hang pieces of clothing such as  
jackets over the backrests.  
Do not modify individual components or  
wiring. This also applies to steering wheel  
covers, the dashboard, and the seats.  
▷
▷
▷
Keep a distance from the airbags.  
Fasten the seat belts correctly.  
▷
Do not disassemble the airbag system.  
Always grasp the steering wheel on the  
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the  
172  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Even when you follow all instructions very  
closely, injury from contact with the airbags  
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.  
Malfunction  
▷
Warning light does not illuminate  
when drive-ready state is turned on.  
The ignition and inflation noise may lead  
to short-term and, in most cases, temporary  
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.  
▷
The warning light illuminates con-  
tinuously.  
The airbag system or the seat belt tension-  
ers may not be operational. Have the vehicle  
checked immediately by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabil-  
ities may affect the air bag system; contact  
BMW Customer Relations for further informa-  
tion.  
Warnings and information on the airbags are  
also found on the sun visors.  
Setting the front seat positions  
Operational readiness of the airbag  
system  
The power that deploys the driver's/front  
passenger airbags depends on the position of  
the driver's/front passenger seat.  
Safety information  
To maintain the accuracy of this function, cali-  
brate the electrical front seats as soon as a re-  
spective message appears on the control dis-  
play.  
Warning  
Individual components can be hot after de-  
ployment of the airbag system. There is a risk  
of injury. Do not touch individual components.  
Additional information:  
Seats, refer to page 105.  
Automatic deactivation of  
the front passenger airbags  
Warning  
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,  
malfunction or unintentional deployment of  
the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc-  
tion, the airbag system might not deploy as  
intended despite the accident severity. There  
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the  
airbag system checked, repaired, disassem-  
bled, and scrapped by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
Principle  
The automatic front passenger airbag deacti-  
vation can detect if the front passenger seat is  
occupied.  
The front passenger airbags are thus activated  
or deactivated.  
Safety information  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Warning  
When drive-ready state is turned on,  
the warning light in the instrument  
To ensure the front passenger airbag func-  
tion, the system must be able to detect  
cluster illuminates briefly, thereby indi-  
cating the operational readiness of the entire  
airbag system and the seat belt tensioners.  
whether a person is sitting in the front pass-  
enger seat. The entire seat surface must be  
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injury  
173  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
or danger to life. Make sure that the front  
passenger keeps his or her feet in the foot-  
well.  
Indicator light for the front  
passenger airbags  
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger  
airbag in the headliner indicates the operating  
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.  
Functional requirements  
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied  
seat surface:  
The light indicates whether the airbags are ei-  
ther activated or deactivated.  
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light  
shortly illuminates and then indicates whether  
the airbags are either activated or deactivated.  
▷
Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats  
or other items to the front passenger seat  
unless they are specifically determined to  
be safe for use on the front passenger seat.  
Display  
Function  
▷
▷
▷
Do not place objects under the seat that  
can press against the seat from below.  
The indicator light is contin-  
uously illuminated when the  
seat is not occupied or when a  
child is detected on the seat in  
a provided child restraint sys-  
tem as intended. The airbags  
on the passenger's side are  
not activated.  
Sit upright in the seat with your back  
against the backrest.  
Sit down with your feet touching the floor.  
Installing child restraint systems  
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied  
seat surface of the front passenger seat:  
The indicator light does not il-  
luminate when, for instance, a  
correctly seated person of suf-  
ficient size is detected on the  
seat. The airbags on the pas-  
senger's side are activated.  
▷
Pay attention to the specifications and the  
operating and safety information of the  
child restraint system manufacturer when  
using child restraint systems.  
▷
▷
Make sure that the seat surface of the child  
restraint system rests as flat as possible on  
the seat surface.  
When the front passenger seat is occupied,  
check the indicator light before and while driv-  
ing.  
Move the head restraint up or remove it to  
ensure that the child restraint system rests  
as flat as possible against the rear seat  
backrest.  
Fault of the automatic deactivation  
system  
When transporting older children and adults,  
the front passenger airbags may be deacti-  
vated in certain seat positions. In this case, the  
indicator light for the front passenger airbags  
illuminates.  
▷
Observe the maximum size of the child re-  
straint system, for example to avoid possi-  
ble touching the roof.  
Before transporting a child on the front pass-  
enger seat, refer to the safety information and  
instructions for children on the front passenger  
seat, see Children.  
In this case, change the seat position so that  
the front passenger airbags are activated and  
the indicator light goes out.  
More information: installation of child restraint  
systems, refer to page 117.  
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have  
the person sit in the rear seat.  
174  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Occupancy detection  
The occupancy detection meets the statutory  
requirements of the Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standard FMVSS 208 and deactivates  
the passenger airbags under certain condi-  
tions.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Collision warning systems  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle has  
different systems that can help prevent the risk  
of imminent collision.  
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake in-  
tervention, refer to page 176.  
Sensors  
▷
▷
▷
Exit warning, refer to page 185.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Intelli-  
gent Safety systems are controlled by the fol-  
lowing sensors:  
Lane departure warning, refer to page 187.  
Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to  
page 190.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
▷
▷
Side collision mitigation, refer to page 192.  
Rear-end collision preparation, refer to  
page 194.  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
▷
Traffic Light And Sign Warning, refer to  
page 195.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
Wrong way warning, refer to page 197.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 41.  
No Turn on Red function, refer to page 198.  
Turning on/turning off collision  
warning systems  
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to  
page 199.  
Depending on national-market version, some  
of the systems are automatically activated  
whenever you start driving.  
Safety information  
The following functions are adjustable.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. Select the desired settings.  
175  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Resetting the settings  
The settings of the collision warning systems  
can be reset to the default settings at vehicle  
outbound delivery.  
Forward Collision Mitigation  
with brake intervention  
Principle  
1.  
Apps menu  
The Forward Collision Mitigation can help  
prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be  
avoided, the system can help reduce the se-  
verity of the accident.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Reset to recommended settings"  
The system can issue a warning of a possible  
risk of collision and activate the brakes inde-  
pendently, if needed.  
System limits  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the For-  
ward Collision Mitigation system includes the  
following functions:  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Warning function in rear-end collision situa-  
tions, refer to page 179.  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Warning function for oncoming traffic, refer  
to page 180.  
Warning function for turning with oncoming  
traffic, refer to page 181.  
Warning function for pedestrians, refer to  
page 182.  
Warning function at intersections, refer to  
page 183.  
Detection capability  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
Evasion Assistant, refer to page 184.  
The system only takes into account objects  
that are located in the detection range of the  
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-  
tem.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.  
Thus, a system response might not come or  
might come late.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 41.  
176  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Turning on system manually  
The system is activated by setting the warning  
time.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Additional information:  
Setting the warning time, refer to page 177.  
Turning system off manually  
Depending on national-market version, the ad-  
justment can only be made when the vehicle is  
at a standstill or in a very low speed range.  
If necessary, the switch-off must be confirmed  
successively on the control display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Sensors  
2. "Vehicle"  
Depending on the equipment, the system is  
controlled by the following sensors:  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"  
7. "Off"  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 41.  
Setting the warning time  
1.  
Apps menu  
Speed range  
The system issues a warning of a possi-  
ble risk of collision at speeds above approx.  
3 mph/5 km/h.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily.  
Some functions are deactivated earlier.  
The more sensitive the warning time is set to  
be, the more warnings will be displayed. The  
system can therefore also issue more early or  
unfounded warnings and reactions.  
The system is enabled as soon as the speed  
drops below these values again.  
Turning the Forward Collision  
Mitigation on/off  
The system checks for visual impairments. De-  
pending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver  
Attention Camera in the instrument cluster  
captures the driver’s field of vision. Visibility  
and field of vision also affect the timing of the  
warnings.  
Turning on the system automatically  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically active after every de-  
parture.  
177  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-  
diately.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The following indicator lights and warning  
lights are shown on the instrument cluster and,  
depending on vehicle equipment, on the Head-  
up display:  
▷
▷
A warning signal sounds:  
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-  
diately.  
Automatic brake intervention:  
Icon  
Meaning  
Depending on the equipment and situation  
in case of risk of imminent collision, the  
system can also intervene with an auto-  
matic brake intervention and automatically  
decelerate the vehicle, if necessary, to a  
complete stop.  
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a  
pedestrian.  
Risk of collision, for instance with an  
oncoming or a vehicle driving ahead.  
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and  
hard, the maximum brake power of the vehicle  
is used.  
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle  
crossing from the right.  
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle  
crossing from the left.  
Automatic brake intervention  
In case of a risk of collision, the system can  
assist with an automatic brake intervention, if  
necessary.  
General risk of collision.  
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,  
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.  
The corresponding indicator lights and warn-  
ing lights may display differently if the system  
detects multiple objects.  
During automatic brake intervention, Dynamic  
Stability Control activates automatically.  
A brake intervention can be canceled by de-  
pressing the accelerator pedal with sufficient  
force, releasing the brake pedal, or by actively  
steering.  
Warning function  
The Forward Collision Mitigation warns on dif-  
ferent warning levels, depending on the re-  
spective hazardous situation.  
Depending on the equipment and situation,  
the brake intervention can occur up to approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h.  
In the event of a prewarning, a warning light  
illuminates red. In the event of an acute warn-  
ing, a warning light flashes red and a warning  
tone sounds.  
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,  
only a brief brake intervention will occur.  
In the event of a system warning, the driver  
must intervene immediately and in accordance  
with the situation.  
▷
Red warning light illuminates:  
A hazardous situation has been detected.  
Increased awareness is required.  
▷
Red warning light flashes:  
178  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
Warning function in forward  
collision situations  
Safety information  
Principle  
Warning  
The warning function in forward collision situa-  
tions warns of a possible risk of collision and  
may brake independently.  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
General information  
Detection capability  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
The system only takes into account objects  
that are located in the detection range of the  
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-  
tem.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
Thus, a system response might not come or  
might come late.  
The system issues a warning of a possible risk  
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-  
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings  
may vary with the current driving situation.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
The system considers the driver’s vehicle han-  
dling when responding. If an active driving  
style is detected, warnings and brake interven-  
tions occur less frequently.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 41.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
With limitation of the driving stability control  
systems.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.  
▷
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
Also, do not use Forward Collision Mitigation  
when towing.  
179  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Meaning  
General information  
Icon  
Forward Collision Warning with a de-  
tected vehicle.  
General risk of collision.  
Warning function  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 176.  
The system issues a warning of a possible risk  
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-  
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings  
may vary with the current driving situation.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
or only detected with a delay, for instance:  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.  
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-  
proached at high speed.  
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of  
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-  
hicle is detected.  
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.  
General risk of collision.  
Warning function for  
oncoming traffic  
Warning function  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
Principle  
The warning function for oncoming traffic can  
warn of a possible risk of collision with oncom-  
ing vehicles and may brake independently.  
In case of a possible risk of collision, a brake  
intervention is triggered.  
Additional information:  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 176.  
180  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
Icon  
Meaning  
Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-  
hicle is detected.  
▷
▷
Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.  
Vehicles with an unusual front view.  
General risk of collision.  
Warning function for turning  
with oncoming traffic  
Warning function  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
Principle  
There is a risk of an accident with oncom-  
ing vehicles when turning across the oncom-  
ing lane. The system can issue a warning of  
a possible risk of collision and activate the  
brakes independently, if needed.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 176.  
System limits  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
General information  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
▷
▷
▷
Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.  
Vehicles that are hidden by other vehicles.  
Vehicles with an unusual front view.  
Upper speed limit  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
The system is active when the own speed is  
below approx. 15 mph/25 km/h.  
The system issues a warning of a possible risk  
of collision with oncoming vehicles at speeds  
from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of  
warnings may vary with the current driving sit-  
uation.  
181  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected pe-  
destrian or cyclist, a warning light is displayed.  
Warning function for  
pedestrians  
Icon  
Meaning  
Principle  
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a  
pedestrian.  
At speeds that are common in towns and cit-  
ies, the warning function warns the driver of a  
possible risk of collision with pedestrians and  
cyclists. The system may brake automatically.  
General risk of collision.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
Warning function  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
General information  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 176.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range when on a straight line.  
Detection range  
The detection range consists of the following  
parts:  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range when turning.  
▷
▷
Area in front of the vehicle, arrow 1.  
The system issues a warning of a possible  
risk of collision with pedestrians or cyclists at  
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
With side radar sensors in front: side areas,  
arrows 2.  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
182  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.  
At intersections and junctions, a warning is is-  
sued when a risk of collision with crossing traf-  
fic is detected.  
Pedestrians that are not detected as such  
because of their contour or posture.  
The system issues a warning of a possible risk  
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-  
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
▷
Pedestrians who are too small for the sen-  
sors to detect.  
The timing of warnings may vary with the cur-  
rent driving situation.  
Upper speed limit  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the  
system responds to pedestrians and cyclists  
when your vehicle speed is less than approx.  
50 mph/80 km/h.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
Warning function at  
intersections  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.  
Principle  
Icon  
Meaning  
At speeds that are common in towns and cit-  
ies, the Intersection Collision Warning function  
can warn the driver of a possible risk of colli-  
sion with crossing traffic at intersections and  
junctions. The system may brake automati-  
cally.  
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing  
from the right.  
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing  
from the left.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
General risk of collision.  
General information  
Warning function  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 176.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
Vehicles crossing your driving direction can be  
detected by the system as soon as these vehi-  
cles enter into detection range of the sensors.  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
183  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
Crossing vehicles when they are hidden,  
e.g. by buildings.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
▷
▷
Vehicles with an unusual side view.  
Vehicles in highly dynamic driving situa-  
tions.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation is active.  
Upper speed limit  
The system responds to crossing vehicles  
when the vehicle speed is below approx.  
50 mph/80 km/h.  
▷
Sensors detect sufficient clearance around  
vehicle.  
Speed range  
The Evasion Assistant helps the driver  
when the vehicle speed is between approx.  
19 mph/30 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h.  
Evasion Assistant  
Principle  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle or detected person, e.g., a pedestrian,  
a warning light is displayed.  
The Evasion Assistant can help the driver per-  
form evasive maneuvers in certain situations,  
e.g., when obstacles or pedestrians appear  
suddenly.  
Icon  
Meaning  
General information  
Warning when a vehicle is detected.  
Risk of collision with a pedestrian.  
Risk of collision with unknown obsta-  
cle.  
Warning function with evasion  
support  
If the vehicle approaches another object at a  
high differential speed, a warning is displayed  
if there is an immediate risk of collision.  
The system issues a warning and intervenes  
to support the driver if a lateral evasive ma-  
neuver is possible.  
Sensors monitor and detect the clearance in  
front of the vehicle. Depending on the vehicle  
equipment, the areas next to the vehicle are  
also monitored.  
Intervene in case of a warning.  
The system is designed to provide assistance  
during evasive maneuvers when there is a risk  
of collision.  
If the system detects sufficient free space  
alongside the vehicle, it helps the driver per-  
form an evasive maneuver safely.  
A message in the instrument cluster and, de-  
pending on the equipment, in the Head-up dis-  
play signals the evasion support.  
184  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is  
monitored as well. Two additional radar sen-  
sors are located in the front bumper.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
The system monitors the vehicle's surround-  
ings for a limited time after you get in or park.  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
A possible risk of collision is indicated by vari-  
ous warning functions.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-  
proached at high speed.  
▷
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of  
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
Sensors  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.  
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.  
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
▷
▷
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Pedestrians that are not detected as such  
because of their contour or posture.  
Depending on the equipment: radar sen-  
sors, side, front.  
▷
Pedestrians who are too small for the sen-  
sors to detect.  
Turning the exit warning on/off  
Exit warning  
Turning on the system automatically  
The exit warning activates automatically after  
departure if the function was switched on at  
the completion of the last trip.  
Principle  
The exit warning helps to avoid accidents.  
The system can warn the occupants when  
they are opening the doors and a risk of colli-  
sion with approaching objects is detected.  
Turning system off manually  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Exit warning"  
7. "Off"  
General information  
Adjusting the exit warning  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor  
the area behind the vehicle.  
3. "Driving settings"  
185  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Exit warning"  
An object was detected in the opening area.  
Increased awareness is required.  
Acute warning  
7. Select the desired setting.  
In the event of an acute warning, the warn-  
ing light in the exterior mirror flashes, as does  
the ambient light, depending on vehicle equip-  
ment. In addition, a signal tone sounds.  
Turning the warning tone on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
There is a risk of collision when opening the  
doors.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Exit warning"  
Door functions  
In vehicles with electrical door locks, unlocking  
is delayed.  
7. "Warning tone"  
System limits  
Displays  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
▷
▷
▷
Fully or partially hidden objects.  
Stationary or very slow objects.  
Pedestrians.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
Ambient light  
Depending on the equipment, warnings are  
also indicated by the ambient light in the inte-  
rior.  
▷
The speed of an approaching vehicle is too  
fast or too slow.  
▷
▷
In curves.  
In case of fully or partially hidden objects.  
Warning function  
Prewarning  
In the event of an advance warning, the warn-  
ing light in the exterior mirror illuminates. De-  
pending on the equipment, the ambient light  
also flashes.  
186  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
not jerk the steering wheel in response to a  
warning.  
Lane Departure Warning  
with active return  
Principle  
Warning  
The lane departure warning alerts when the  
vehicle is about to run off the road or exit the  
lane.  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
An automatic steering intervention helps to  
keep the vehicle in its lane.  
General information  
Functional requirement  
The camera must detect the lane boundaries  
for the lane departure warning to be active.  
The areas of the sensors must be clean and  
clear.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
Sensors  
Depending on the equipment, the system is  
controlled by the following sensors:  
The system issues a warning starting at a min-  
imum speed. The minimum speed is country-  
specific and displayed on the control display.  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Warnings are displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter. In addition, the steering wheel vibrates.  
Radar sensor, side, front.  
The system does not provide a warning if the  
turn signal is set in the respective direction be-  
fore exiting the lane.  
Turning the Lane Departure  
Warning on/off  
Safety information  
Turning on the system automatically  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically active after every de-  
parture.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in assess-  
ing road and traffic situations. There is a  
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic  
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate Do  
Turning on system manually  
The system is activated by the selected warn-  
ing setting.  
Additional information:  
187  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Configuring the warning, refer to page 188.  
or cross a lane marking, a warning is is-  
sued and a steering intervention is per-  
formed.  
Turning system off manually  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, you must successively confirm  
the switch-off on the control display.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1.  
Apps menu  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Lane Departure Warning"  
7. "Off"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
6. "Vibration intensity"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
The setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
Setting Lane Departure Warning  
Depending on the national-market  
version: turning steering intervention  
on/off  
Configuring the warning  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Apps menu  
3. "Driving settings"  
2. "Vehicle"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Lane Departure Warning"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Lane Departure Warning"  
7. "Steering intervention"  
▷
"Expanded"  
If the system detects that your vehicle  
is about to leave your lane or cross a  
lane marking, a warning is issued. The  
system performs a steering intervention.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
steering intervention is automatically active af-  
ter every driving off.  
▷
"In dangerous situations"  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Different system statuses are displayed on  
the instrument cluster, depending on vehicle  
equipment and national-market version.  
Broken road lines: If the system detects  
that the vehicle is about to inadvertently  
cross a lane marking, or if the sensors  
detect an oncoming vehicle, a warning  
is issued and a steering intervention is  
performed.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Indicator light flashes green: System  
is performing a steering intervention.  
Depending on national-market version,  
with continuous lane markings: If the  
system detects that your vehicle is  
about to inadvertently leave your lane  
188  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-  
ment cluster.  
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is limited.  
Immediately following a steering interven-  
tion by the vehicle systems.  
Additional information:  
Warning signal  
Assisted View, refer to page 152.  
Depending on the national-market version: in  
the event of multiple active steering interven-  
tions by the system within 3 minutes with-  
out the driver's intervention at the steering  
wheel during the steering intervention itself, an  
acoustic warning will sound. A short warning  
signal will sound at the second steering inter-  
vention. Beginning with the third steering inter-  
vention, a continuous warning will sound.  
Warning function  
If you leave the lane  
If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary  
has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates  
in accordance with the steering wheel vibration  
setting.  
In addition, a Check Control message is dis-  
played.  
In addition, the indicator light flashes  
green.  
The warning signal and Check Control mes-  
sage advise to pay closer attention to the lane.  
When the turn signal is switched on in the cor-  
responding direction before changing the lane,  
a warning is not issued.  
The extended warning tone stops when the  
steering wheel is moved manually.  
Steering intervention  
End of warning  
Depending on the equipment and the national-  
market version: if a lane marking is crossed in  
the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the  
system intervenes with a brief active steering  
intervention in addition to vibrating. The sys-  
tem supports the driver in keeping the vehicle  
within the lane. The steering intervention can  
be noticed on the steering wheel and can be  
manually overridden at any time.  
For instance, the warning or an active steering  
intervention will be canceled in the following  
situations:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Automatically after a few seconds.  
When returning to your own lane.  
With hard accelerating or braking.  
With hazard warning system switched on.  
When flashing.  
When steering intervention is active,  
the indicator light flashes green.  
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
▷
Immediately following a steering interven-  
tion by the vehicle systems.  
For instance, the steering intervention will be  
suppressed in the following situations:  
▷
▷
With manual steering intervention.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
With hard accelerating or braking.  
When flashing.  
When another driver assistance system is  
activated, if applicable.  
With hazard warning system switched on.  
▷
▷
No lane boundaries detected.  
In driving situation with high driving dynam-  
ics.  
When the system limits are reached.  
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
189  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
General information  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
▷
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
Radar sensors monitor the area behind and  
next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a  
minimum speed.  
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
The minimum speed is country-specific and  
displayed in the Active Blind Spot Detection  
menu.  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
The system indicates whether there are vehi-  
cles in your blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching  
from behind in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The  
warning light in the exterior mirror illuminates  
dimly.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
The system will warn in the previously named  
situations prior to a lane change. The warn-  
ing light in the exterior mirror flashes and the  
steering wheel vibrates.  
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
While Dynamic Stability Control is limited.  
When turning at a speed of up to approx.  
12 mph/20 km/h, the steering wheel will not  
vibrate.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited. A yellow warning  
light also illuminates, depending on national-  
market version.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
Active Blind Spot Detection  
with active return  
Sensors  
Principle  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles  
in the blind spot or vehicles approaching from  
behind in the adjacent lane.  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror gives  
warnings at different levels.  
Depending on the equipment: radar sen-  
sors, side, front.  
An automatic steering intervention helps to  
keep the vehicle in its lane.  
190  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
The setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
Functional requirement  
The areas of the sensors must be clean and  
clear.  
Depending on the national-market  
version: turning steering intervention  
on/off  
Turning Active Blind Spot Detection  
on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"  
7. "Steering intervention"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the system activates automati-  
cally whenever you start driving.  
Warning function  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
Adjusting the Active Blind Spot  
Detection  
Configuring the warning  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.  
Prewarning  
The dimmed warning light in the exterior mirror  
indicates when vehicles are in your blind spot  
or approaching from the rear.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Acute warning  
When an acute warning occurs, the steering  
wheel vibrates briefly. The warning light in the  
exterior mirror flashes brightly.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
6. "Vibration intensity"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
An acute warning is issued if the following con-  
ditions are met:  
191  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Another vehicle is located in the critical  
area.  
Displaying warnings  
The number of warnings shown depends on  
how the settings are configured. However,  
there may also be an excess of unwarranted  
warnings of critical situations.  
Your own vehicle is approaching the other  
lane.  
Depending on the system setting when the  
turn signal is turned on.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
The warning stops when the other vehicle has  
left the critical area.  
Steering intervention  
▷
When a vehicle is approaching at a speed  
much faster than your own.  
Depending on the national-market version:  
when there is no response to the vibration  
of the steering wheel at speeds of up to  
130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking  
is crossed, the system engages the active  
steering intervention. The steering intervention  
helps return the vehicle into the lane. The  
steering intervention can be noticed on the  
steering wheel and can be manually overrid-  
den at any time.  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,  
for instance by stickers.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
steering intervention e.g. in the following situa-  
tions:  
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
The steering intervention is carried out from  
a minimum speed. The minimum speed is dis-  
played on the control display.  
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are not white.  
Warning light flashing  
When the vehicle is unlocked, the warning light  
in the exterior mirror flashes for self-testing  
purposes.  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
▷
▷
If the camera is impaired.  
System limits  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited. A yellow warning  
light also illuminates, depending on national-  
market version.  
Upper speed limit  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily.  
Side collision mitigation  
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reactivated.  
Principle  
The side-collision warning helps to avoid an  
impending side collision.  
192  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Turning the side collision warning  
on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Side collision warning"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Radar sensors monitor the space next to the  
vehicle when traveling faster than a minimum  
speed and up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
The minimum speed is country-specific and  
displayed on the control display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
If, for example, another vehicle is detected next  
to your vehicle and there is a risk of collision  
with this vehicle, the system helps avoid a col-  
lision. For this purpose, the system issues a  
warning with a flashing LED in the exterior mir-  
ror, a Check Control message and a vibrating  
steering wheel. If necessary, an active steering  
intervention is performed by the system.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
6. "Vibration intensity"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
The setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-  
ment cluster.  
Functional requirement  
The camera behind the windshield determines  
the lane boundary positions.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 152.  
The camera must detect the lane markings for  
the side collision mitigation with steering inter-  
vention to be active.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
193  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
Warning function  
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are not white.  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited.  
Acute warning  
If there is a risk of collision, the warning light  
in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering  
wheel starts vibrating.  
Rear-end collision  
preparation  
A Check Control message is displayed at the  
same time.  
Principle  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, the rear-end collision prepara-  
tion can react to vehicles approaching from be-  
hind.  
Steering intervention  
Depending on the national-market version,  
if necessary, the system engages the active  
steering intervention to prevent a collision and  
maintain the vehicle within its own lane. The  
steering intervention can be noticed on the  
steering wheel and can be manually overrid-  
den at any time.  
General information  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Radar sensors monitor the area behind the ve-  
hicle.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a  
certain speed, the system can react as follows:  
194  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Where applicable, the hazard warning  
flashers will be switched on.  
General information  
The system evaluates traffic signs and traffic  
lights using a camera behind the windshield.  
Where applicable, the PreCrash functions  
are triggered.  
The navigation system directs information on  
the road layout to the system.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
A warning is given if the right of way is about  
to be violated, e.g., in the following traffic situa-  
tions:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
At an intersection.  
Sensors  
At a road entrance.  
The system is controlled by the radar sensors  
on the sides and rear.  
On a highway entrance ramp.  
At a roundabout.  
With a red traffic light.  
Turning rear-end collision  
preparation on/off  
The system is automatically active when the  
vehicle is turned on.  
The system issues a warning as from a vari-  
able minimum speed and at speeds up to ap-  
prox. 60 mph/100 km/h.  
The following traffic signs are taken into ac-  
count for the Traffic Light And Sign Warning:  
The system is deactivated when reversing.  
Sign Meaning  
System limits  
Give way signs:  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
A pre-warning is issued for these  
road signs.  
Stop signs:  
A pre-warning is issued for these  
road signs.  
Functional limitations  
This function may be restricted if the speed  
of the approaching vehicle is much higher or  
similar to your own speed.  
When traffic lights are red, a pre-  
warning and an acute warning will be  
issued.  
Traffic Light And Sign  
Warning  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
Principle  
Functional requirement  
The right-of-way situation ahead of the vehicle  
must be clearly controlled by traffic signs or  
light signal systems.  
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning provides  
support in situations in which the right-of-way  
needs to be yielded based on road signs or  
traffic lights.  
195  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Prewarning  
Sensors  
If there is a risk that a right of way is about to  
be violated, one of the following icons appears  
in the instrument cluster:  
The system is controlled by a camera behind  
the windshield.  
Turning the Traffic Light And Sign  
Warning on/off  
Icon  
Meaning  
Give way.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Stop.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Traffic Light and Sign Warning"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Red traffic light.  
When a prewarning is issued, intervene as  
appropriate for the situation; for example, by  
braking.  
Setting the warning time  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Acute warning  
3. "Driving settings"  
If there is an acute risk that the right of way  
is about to be violated, an acoustic signal will  
sound and one of the following icons will ap-  
pear in the instrument cluster:  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Traffic Light and Sign Warning"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Icon  
Meaning  
The selected setting is saved and adopted for  
the next journey.  
Red traffic light.  
Warning function  
When an acute warning is issued, intervene as  
appropriate for the situation; for example, by  
braking.  
General information  
The system issues a two-phase warning:  
▷
▷
Prewarning: visual warning by an icon in  
the instrument cluster.  
Display in the Head-up display  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the  
warning is displayed simultaneously in the  
Head-up display and in the instrument cluster.  
Acute warning: visual warning by an icon  
in the instrument cluster and an additional  
acoustic signal.  
The timing of the warning varies with the ac-  
tual driving situation and the warning time set-  
ting.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
196  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
stance onto freeways, roundabouts and one-  
way streets.  
No warning  
The system does not issue a warning in the  
following situations, for example:  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the sys-  
tem uses navigation data and traffic signs to  
check the traffic situation.  
▷
▷
In right-of-way situations without right-of-  
way signs, stop signs, or red light signal  
systems.  
With intersections with relevant traffic lights  
that are illuminated yellow or green.  
For example, the system takes the following  
traffic signs into account:  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
▷
▷
▷
No entrance.  
Roundabout.  
Directional arrows: mandatory bypass.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
If road signs or light signal systems are un-  
clear.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
fully or partially concealed or soiled.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
difficult to read or rotated.  
Functional requirement  
The road layout ahead must be controlled  
clearly with traffic signs.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
too small or too large.  
If the traffic signs do not correspond to the  
standard.  
Sensors  
When traffic signs are detected that apply  
to a junction or parallel street.  
The system is controlled by a camera behind  
the windshield.  
In the presence of country-specific road  
signs or road layouts.  
Turning wrong way warning on/off  
Depending on national-market version, the  
wrong way warning is automatically activated  
whenever you start driving.  
With intersections with flashing light signal  
systems.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
Warning function  
In the case of navigation data that is inva-  
lid, outdated or not available.  
A warning is displayed and a signal  
tone sounds, for example when the ve-  
hicle is traveling in the wrong direction  
on a highway, roundabout or one-way street.  
In some regions, the system may not be  
available or only partially available.  
Warnings are displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter and, depending on the equipment, in the  
Head-up display.  
Wrong way warning  
Principle  
The wrong way warning warns the driver of  
an upcoming wrong entry onto roads, for in-  
197  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
To do so, this function analyzes traffic lights  
and traffic signs using the camera behind the  
windshield. In addition, the navigation system  
data is used.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
No warning  
For example, the system does not issue a  
warnings for road layouts without traffic signs.  
Functional requirements  
▷
The system detects the right-of-way situa-  
tion ahead by analyzing traffic lights and  
traffic signs.  
Functional limitations  
The function may be limited in the following  
situations, for instance, and will either output  
an incorrect wrong way warning or no warning  
at all:  
▷
▷
Vehicle is less than approx. 164 ft/50 m  
from the traffic lights.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: the Traf-  
fic Light And Sign Warning is turned on.  
▷
▷
When the signage is not clear.  
If the traffic signs are fully or partially con-  
cealed or soiled.  
Sensors  
▷
If the traffic signs are poorly legible or ro-  
tated.  
The system is controlled by a camera behind  
the windshield.  
▷
▷
If the traffic signs are too small or too large.  
If the traffic signs do not correspond to the  
standard.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If the driver approaches a red traffic  
light with a traffic sign that prohibits  
a turn on red, an indicator light is dis-  
played on the instrument cluster.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When traffic signs are detected that apply  
to a junction or parallel street.  
In the presence of country-specific road  
signs or road layouts.  
The indicator light goes out automatically after  
you drive off at a speed greater than approx.  
9 mph/15 km/h.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
In the case of navigation data that is inva-  
lid, outdated or not available.  
System limits  
It may not be possible to use the system in  
all regions.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
No Turn on Red function  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
Principle  
This function provides assistance to the driver  
at traffic lights where turning on red is prohib-  
ited.  
198  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
If road signs or light signal systems are un-  
clear.  
sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
fully or partially concealed or soiled.  
Functional requirements  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
difficult to read or rotated.  
▷
▷
▷
The Emergency Stop Assistant is activated  
via iDrive.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
too small or too large.  
The system is activated from a speed of  
approx. 43 mph/70 km/h.  
If the traffic signs do not correspond to the  
standard.  
The Driver Attention Camera detects driver  
activity.  
With intersections with flashing light signal  
systems.  
Triggering the Emergency Stop  
Assistant  
If the system detects that the driver is no  
longer driving the vehicle safely or ignores  
warnings, the Emergency Stop Assistant is  
triggered automatically. The triggered system  
is displayed in the instrument cluster.  
In the case of navigation data that is inva-  
lid, outdated or not available.  
In some regions, this function may not be  
completely available or not available at all.  
Emergency Stop Assistant  
The Emergency Stop Assistant can also be  
triggered via voice input.  
Principle  
Additional information:  
If the driver can no longer drive the vehicle  
safely, the Emergency Stop Assistant helps to  
bring the vehicle to a safe standstill.  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 59.  
An immediate emergency call can be triggered  
on the control display.  
General information  
The Emergency Stop Assistant is triggered au-  
tomatically.  
The following is performed automatically when  
the Emergency Stop Assistant is triggered:  
▷
A display is shown on the instrument clus-  
ter.  
When the system is triggered, the vehicle is  
brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of  
lane keeping.  
▷
The system takes over vehicle handling un-  
til the vehicle comes to a standstill.  
Safety information  
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is switched on.  
An emergency call is triggered when sta-  
tionary, depending on vehicle equipment.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
one's physical state. An increasing lack of  
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or  
not be detected in time. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Make  
Activating/deactivating Emergency  
Stop Assistant  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
199  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Emergency stop"  
The Emergency Stop Assistant may be re-  
stricted in the following situations:  
▷
When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-  
ered by the steering wheel.  
7. Select the desired setting.  
▷
With sunglasses with high protection from  
infrared light.  
Canceling Emergency Stop  
Assistant  
The driver can cancel the Emergency Stop As- Cross Traffic Warning with  
sistant by actively taking control of the vehicle  
Braking  
throughout the entire process.  
For instance, the system will be canceled in the  
following situations:  
Principle  
At blind driveway exits or when driving out of  
perpendicular parking spaces, road users ap-  
proaching from the side are detected sooner  
by the cross traffic warning than is possible  
from the driver's seat.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
With strong countersteering.  
When flashing.  
If the accelerator pedal is pressed hard.  
When switching off the hazard warning sys-  
tem.  
General information  
▷
▷
If the system is interrupted on the control  
display.  
When changing the selector lever position if  
the vehicle was already stationary.  
At standstill  
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the sys-  
tem will carry out the following settings:  
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is secured against rolling away.  
The interior lights are switched on.  
The area behind the vehicle is monitored by  
sensors.  
The central locking system is unlocked.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is  
monitored as well.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Status  
The system indicates approaching road users.  
Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-  
gered.  
If there is a collision risk when reversing, the  
system will provide assistance by performing  
an automatic brake intervention.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
System limits  
The system cannot replace the roadworthy  
driving performance of a driver.  
200  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Turning on the cross traffic warning  
automatically  
The system must be activated on the control  
display. The system turns on automatically as  
soon as Park Distance Control or a camera  
view activates and you engage a gear position.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is  
switched on.  
Depending on the equipment, the front system  
is turned on when a gear position is engaged.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically active when the vehi-  
cle is started.  
Turning off the cross traffic warning  
automatically  
The system is automatically turned off in the  
following situations:  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
▷
▷
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
▷
▷
When the speed exceeds walking speed.  
Depending on the equipment: radar sen-  
sors, side, front.  
When a certain distance covered is ex-  
ceeded.  
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic  
Warning  
Warning function  
The system must be activated on the control  
display for the Cross Traffic Warning and brake  
intervention to switch on automatically.  
General information  
The control display shows the corresponding  
view, an acoustic signal may sound as neces-  
sary, and the warning light in the exterior mir-  
ror flashes.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
In case of a brake intervention, a message is  
displayed on the control display and close after  
a brief period of time.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
6. Depending on the equipment, select the  
following setting:  
▷
▷
▷
"Rear warning"  
"Front and rear warning"  
"Brake intervention at rear"  
201  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the  
camera image flashes red if vehicles are de-  
tected by the sensors.  
Visual warning  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your  
own vehicle.  
Acoustic warning  
In addition to the visual warning, a signal tone  
sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re-  
spective direction.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
signal tone will already sound when the gear  
position is engaged.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes  
if the rear sensors detect other vehicles when  
the vehicle is reversing.  
System limits  
Display in the Park Distance Control view  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 41.  
Functional limitations  
The function can be limited, for instance in the  
following situations:  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
Crossing objects are moving at a very slow  
or a very fast speed.  
In the Park Distance Control view, the respec-  
tive boundary area flashes red if vehicles are  
detected by the sensors.  
▷
Other objects that hide cross traffic are in  
the capture range of the sensors.  
Display in camera image  
BMW Drive Recorder  
Principle  
The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video  
recordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to  
document surrounding traffic.  
General information  
Video recordings can be saved in different  
ways:  
Depending on the direction of travel, the view  
to the front or back is displayed in the camera  
image.  
▷
Automatic storage of the recording.  
202  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
The function makes it possible to document  
the accident or theft of the vehicle with the  
corresponding recording type set.  
Theft notification:  
▷
The theft notification was activated in the  
Data Protection menu or in the Drive Re-  
corder menu.  
▷
Manual storage of the recording.  
This function is used to document traffic sit-  
uations with the configured recording type.  
▷
▷
Data transfer is activated.  
My BMW App is installed on the mobile de-  
vice.  
The assistance systems' cameras are used to  
record, e.g., Panorama View.  
▷
▷
My BMW App is linked with the Connected-  
Drive account.  
Additionally, the following parameters are  
stored for the trip:  
Privacy Policy was accepted.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Date.  
Activating/deactivating the BMW  
Drive Recorder  
The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated  
before the first use of the recording function.  
Time.  
Vehicle speed.  
Global Positioning System coordinates.  
Data protection  
1.  
Apps menu  
The permissibility of recording and using video  
recordings is contingent upon the statutory  
regulations of the country in which the system  
is to be used. The user is responsible for the  
use of the system and compliance with respec-  
tive applicable regulations.  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. Accept Privacy Policy.  
5. "Settings"  
6. "Allow recording"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends  
confirming there are no statutory or regulatory  
constraints on use of the system in your state  
or country prior to the initial use. In addition,  
the laws with respect to use of the system  
should be verified in regular intervals, espe-  
cially when borders are frequently crossed.  
Recording functions  
Automatic recording  
The recording is automatically stored when the  
vehicle sensors detect an accident or theft.  
Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed  
about the system. In addition, information  
about the system is required when handing off  
the vehicle.  
▷
In case of accident:  
The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-  
onds before and after storage is triggered.  
▷
In case of theft:  
Functional requirements  
Depending on the selected recording dura-  
tion, the system saves the recording after it  
has been triggered.  
▷
Standby state or drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
BMW Drive Recorder is activated.  
Privacy Policy was accepted.  
Recording type was selected.  
Recording time was selected.  
When the alarm system is triggered, a mes-  
sage is sent to the My BMW App.  
After saving the recording, the reduced  
quality video can be downloaded to a mo-  
bile device.  
203  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
If the vehicle accelerates rapidly, an automatic  
recording may be taken.  
if the parking brake is engaged or if the selec-  
tor lever is in the P position.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Manual recording  
2. "All apps"  
Using the button  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Recordings"  
5. Select desired recording.  
6. If necessary, select camera.  
Settings  
Recording type  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
Press and hold this button.  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Settings"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Via iDrive  
Start the recording:  
Recording time  
1.  
Apps menu  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Recording"  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Settings"  
5. "Start recording"  
Stop the recording: "Stop recording".  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Recording on a mobile device  
The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-  
onds before and after storage is triggered.  
Principle  
Recording playback and  
administration  
Stored video recordings can be played back,  
exported and deleted.  
Depending on the equipment version, video  
recordings can be stored directly on a mobile  
device such as a smartphone or USB storage.  
General information  
The length of the video that can be stored de-  
pends on the available memory capacity on  
the mobile device.  
For your own safety, the video recording is  
only displayed on the control display up to ap-  
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market  
versions, the video recording is only displayed  
Functional requirements  
▷
Privacy Policy was accepted.  
▷
BMW Drive Recorder is activated.  
204  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
To transfer recordings to a mobile device:  
The preferred file system for USB storage is  
NTFS. Other file systems may have limitations.  
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment, a mobile  
device is connected to the vehicle via Wi-Fi  
and Bluetooth audio, or a USB storage de-  
vice is connected.  
In case of theft, the recording is only stored au-  
tomatically when the anti-theft warning system  
has been triggered.  
▷
▷
▷
My BMW App is installed on the mobile de-  
vice.  
If the internet connection is weak or cannot be  
established, theft alerts and video downloads  
may be restricted or not available.  
My BMW App is linked with the Connected-  
Drive account.  
The quality of the Wi-Fi connection affects  
whether recordings can be saved on your  
smartphone. This function may be restricted or  
not available if the connection is weak.  
The My BMW App is permitted to access  
your photo library.  
Recording  
The recording can be started and stopped  
manually.  
Active Protection  
Start the recording:  
Principle  
1.  
Apps menu  
Active Protection prepares occupants and the  
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving  
or collision situations.  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Recording"  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, Active Protection consists of  
various PreCrash functions.  
5. "Start recording"  
Stop the recording: "Stop recording".  
Cameras  
Different cameras can be selected.  
The system is used to detect certain critical  
driving situations that might lead to an acci-  
dent. This includes the following critical driving  
situations:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
▷
▷
▷
Emergency braking.  
Severe understeering.  
Severe oversteering.  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Settings"  
5. "Cam. selection"  
6. Select desired camera.  
Certain functions of several systems can,  
within the system limits, lead to Active Protec-  
tion triggering:  
System limits  
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation: automatic  
brake intervention.  
In the event of serious accidents, it may not  
be possible to store recordings if the damage  
on the vehicle is too great or the power supply  
was interrupted.  
▷
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation: brake booster.  
Rear-end collision preparation: detection of  
impending rear-end collisions.  
If you repeatedly overwrite a USB drive, it may  
not be possible to export recordings correctly.  
205  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
than the brake pressure generated by auto-  
matic braking. Automatic braking with Post-  
Crash iBrake is canceled.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the  
system limits, critical situations might not be  
detected reliably or in time. There is a risk  
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and  
actively intervene where appropriate  
Abort automatic braking  
It may be necessary to cancel PostCrash  
iBrake automatic braking in certain situations,  
e.g., when making an evasive maneuver.  
Abort automatic braking:  
▷
By depressing the brake pedal for slightly  
longer.  
▷
By pressing the accelerator pedal for  
slightly longer.  
Function  
In an accident-critical driving situation, the win-  
dows are closed automatically, as required, ex-  
cept for a gap.  
Fatigue alert  
Following a critical driving situation without ac-  
cident, the system can be returned to the de-  
sired setting.  
Principle  
The Fatigue Alert break recommendation fea-  
ture can detect when the driver is fatigued or  
less alert during long, monotonous trips, for in-  
stance on highways. The system recommends  
a break.  
PostCrash iBrake  
Principle  
Safety information  
In certain accident situations, the PostCrash  
iBrake can automatically bring the vehicle to a  
standstill without intervention by the driver.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
one's physical state. An increasing lack of  
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or  
not be detected in time. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Make  
sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions.  
General information  
The PostCrash iBrake can reduce the risk of a  
further collision and its consequences.  
At standstill  
After coming to a halt, the brake is released  
automatically.  
Harder vehicle deceleration  
In certain situations, it may be necessary to  
bring the vehicle to a stop more quickly than  
automatic braking with PostCrash iBrake.  
Break recommendation  
Function  
After starting the trip, the system is trained to  
the driver, so that decreasing alertness or fati-  
gue can be detected.  
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the  
brake. The brake pressure will then be higher  
206  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
This procedure takes, for example, the follow-  
ing criteria into account:  
be issued or an unwarranted warning may be  
issued.  
▷
▷
▷
Personal driving style, for instance steering  
behavior.  
The break recommendation function may be  
limited in the following situations:  
Driving conditions, for instance time, length  
of trip.  
▷
▷
If the time is set incorrectly.  
At a predominantly driven speed below ap-  
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h.  
Depending on the equipment: attention  
of the driver through the Driver Attention  
Camera.  
▷
▷
With a sporty driving style such as during  
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.  
The system is active starting at ap-  
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h and can also display a  
break recommendation.  
In active driving situations such as when  
changing lanes frequently.  
▷
▷
When the road condition is poor.  
In the event of strong side winds.  
Setting break recommendation  
The break recommendation can be switched  
on, off and adjusted via iDrive.  
Driver Attention Camera  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Principle  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Fatigue Alert"  
A camera in the instrument cluster monitors  
the driver’s activity and, depending on the  
equipment, the driver’s viewing direction.  
General information  
The assistance systems help drivers by ana-  
lyzing whether they are paying attention, e.g.,  
by evaluating their head position and eyes.  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Despite this function being off, some driver as-  
sistance systems may issue break recommen-  
dations.  
For full operability, make sure that the field of  
view of the Driver Attention Camera is not ob-  
structed.  
Display  
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,  
a message is displayed in the control display  
with the recommendation to take a break.  
Overview  
During the display, various settings can be se-  
lected.  
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after  
parking the vehicle. A break recommendation  
can only be displayed again after this time has  
elapsed.  
System limits  
The Fatigue Alert system may be limited. If  
the system is limited, either no warning may  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the instru-  
ment cluster may have some infrared light  
207  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
sources. Depending on the light conditions,  
these light sources can be visible when the  
vehicle is in standby mode.  
System limits  
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully  
operational in the following situations:  
▷
When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-  
ered by the steering wheel.  
▷
With sunglasses with high protection from  
infrared light.  
208  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Driving stability control systems  
Vehicle features and options Brake assistant  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
The brake assistant automatically applies  
maximum braking assistance when the brake  
pedal is depressed quickly. This reduces the  
braking distance to a minimum for full braking.  
Additional information:  
To make full use of braking assistance, do not  
reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during  
full braking.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Antilock Braking System  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Principle  
Principle  
The Antilock Braking System prevents locking  
of the wheels during the braking process.  
Dynamic Stability Control helps keep the vehi-  
cle on a steady course in critical driving situa-  
tions. The drive power is reduced depending  
on the situation, and wheels can be braked  
individually.  
You remain able to steer your vehicle even dur-  
ing full braking, which increases active driving  
safety.  
General information  
The Antilock Braking System is ready after  
each time drive-ready state is turned on.  
General information  
The system detects the following unstable  
driving conditions, for instance:  
▷
▷
Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.  
Malfunction  
Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which  
can lead to understeering.  
The warning light on the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
The Antilock Braking System is not availa-  
ble.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
Steerability is limited during full braking.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
209  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Setting for increased driving  
dynamics  
Principle  
Warning  
For a more dynamic driving experience, you  
can configure the vehicle for increased driving  
dynamics via My Modes.  
When driving with a roof load, e.g., roof bars,  
the vehicle's center of gravity is higher. This  
increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in crit-  
ical driving situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Drive with  
roof load only with activated Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control.  
General information  
The Dynamic Stability Control and thereby the  
driving stability are limited during acceleration  
and when cornering.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Overview  
View when Dynamic Stability  
Control is restricted.  
Button in the vehicle  
Indicator light illuminates:  
▷
The Dynamic Stability Control is  
limited.  
▷
"SPORT PLUS" is activated.  
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control is regulating the driving and  
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.  
My Modes  
Reduce speed and modify your driving style to  
the driving circumstances.  
Activating/deactivating increased  
driving dynamics  
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Sta-  
bility Control has failed or is initializing.  
Driving stabilization is restricted or has  
failed.  
1.  
Press the button.  
If the warning light illuminates continuously,  
have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
2. "Switch mode"  
3. "SPORT"  
4. "Settings"  
5. "Driving dynamics"  
6. "SPORT PLUS"  
Dynamic Stability Control is activated when  
changing to another drive mode.  
210  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
"SPORT": the last setting applied to Dynamic  
Stability Control remains saved in the mode.  
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"  
5. "Drive-off support"  
6. "Activate once" or "Deactivate"  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The drive-off support remains active until it is  
deactivated or the driving mode is changed.  
Indicator light illuminates: Increased  
driving dynamics activated.  
Display  
Automatic program change  
The increased driving dynamics will be deacti-  
vated automatically, for instance in the follow-  
ing situations:  
If drive-off support is activated, the in-  
dicator light illuminates on the instru-  
ment cluster.  
▷
▷
When the Distance Control is activated.  
BMW xDrive  
In case of a brake intervention by For-  
ward Collision Mitigation. Deactivate For-  
ward Collision Mitigation as necessary.  
Principle  
▷
▷
If the suspension control system fails.  
The vehicle has a flat tire.  
BMW xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of  
the vehicle. Concerted action by the BMW  
xDrive and other suspension control systems  
such as Dynamic Stability Control further opti-  
mizes traction and driving dynamics.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake inter-  
vention, refer to page 176.  
General information  
BMW xDrive variably distributes the drive  
forces to the front and rear axles as required  
by the driving situation and road conditions.  
Drive-off support  
Principle  
The moving-off support offers the best possi-  
ble traction when moving off in certain situa-  
tions on difficult ground such as on snow or  
sand.  
Servotronic  
Principle  
Servotronic is a speed-dependent steering  
support.  
General information  
The function provides maximum drive power  
with adapted driving stability in the low speed  
range.  
The system provides the steering force with  
more support at low speeds than at higher  
ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance,  
and makes steering firmer when driving at  
faster speeds.  
Activating/deactivating the drive-off  
support  
1.  
Apps menu  
Setting  
2. "Vehicle"  
The steering force adapts to the drive mode  
to convey a firm, sporty feel or a comfortable  
steering response.  
3. "Driving settings"  
211  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Malfunction  
Integral Active Steering  
The warning light on the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
Principle  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
The Integral Active Steering increases the ma-  
neuverability of the vehicle and makes a more  
direct steering response possible. Driving sta-  
bility is also increased at high speeds.  
The steering system may not be operational.  
Integral Active Steering assistance may no lon-  
ger be provided.  
▷
▷
▷
Larger steering movements are required at  
low speeds.  
General information  
Integral Active Steering combines variable  
sport steering with active rear-wheel steering.  
The response of the vehicle is more sensi-  
tive in higher speed ranges.  
The rear-wheel steering acts to increase ma-  
neuverability at low speeds by turning the rear  
wheels slightly in the opposite direction to the  
front wheels.  
Proceed cautiously and practice anticipa-  
tory driving.  
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized  
service center or another qualified service cen-  
ter or repair shop.  
At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned  
in the same direction as the front wheels. For  
instance, this results in a harmonious lane  
change.  
In critical driving situations, integral active  
steering can stabilize the vehicle by automat-  
ically steering the rear wheels, for example e.g.  
when oversteering.  
Setting  
The system offers several different settings.  
With the driving modes of the My Modes, the  
system can be set to comfortable or dynamic.  
Additional information:  
My Modes, refer to page 129.  
Using snow chains  
In order to guarantee free movement of the  
wheels when operating with snow chains,  
rear-wheel steering must be turned off when  
snow chains are mounted.  
Additional information:  
Rear-wheel steering during operation with  
snow chains, refer to page 342.  
212  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
Vehicle features and options Speed Limit Info  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
Speed Limit Info  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Principle  
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid  
speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if  
necessary, the Head-up display.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
The camera in the area of the interior mirror  
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as  
well as overhead sign posts.  
Speed warning  
Principle  
The speed warning can be used to set a speed  
limit. A warning will be issued when this speed  
limit is exceeded.  
Traffic signs with extra icons are considered  
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.  
The traffic sign will then be either displayed  
or ignored depending on the situation in the  
instrument cluster and the Head-up display.  
General information  
The system may also show speed limits that  
apply to routes that are not signposted if the  
navigation system has current map data.  
Another speed warning is given when the set  
speed limit is exceeded again after it has drop-  
ped by 3 mph/5 km/h.  
For Speed Limit Info to function correctly, cur-  
rent map data for the country in which the ve-  
hicle is operated must be downloaded.  
Settings  
The Speed Limit Warning can be activated or  
deactivated. In addition, the speed limit for the  
warning can be configured.  
For information on the current map version  
and map updates, see Map update in the Nav-  
igation system chapter.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Without map data, the system is subject to  
certain technical limitations. Traffic signs with  
speed limitations are detected and displayed  
only. Speed limits due to entering towns/cities,  
highway signs, etc., are not displayed. Speed  
limits with extra traffic signs are always dis-  
played.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Speed warning"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
213  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Warning signals  
▷
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
Depending on the settings, an acoustic signal  
sounds if the detected speed limit is exceeded  
or the speed limit changes. The display also  
flashes if the detected speed limit is exceeded.  
Safety information  
Settings  
Warning  
Individual settings can be configured for Speed  
Limit Info, e.g., warnings issued if the speed is  
exceeded or the permissible maximum speed  
changes.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by a camera behind  
the windshield.  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Display  
Speed Limit Info  
▷
Camera, refer to page 41.  
Icon  
Description  
Functional limitations  
The system function may be limited and may  
provide incorrect information in the following  
situations:  
Current speed limit.  
Depending on the national-  
market version, it is possible  
to switch between the units of  
measurement.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Traffic signs are fully or partially concealed  
by objects, stickers, or paint.  
Traffic signs do not comply with the stand-  
ard.  
No data on current speed limit  
available.  
In areas that are not included in the naviga-  
tion system map data.  
Speed Limit Info not available.  
If navigation system map data is invalid,  
outdated, or unavailable.  
When roads deviate from the navigation  
such as due to changes in road layout.  
214  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
Safety information  
When passing buses or trucks with traffic  
signs applied to them.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
▷
In case of electronic traffic signs.  
When traffic signs that are valid for a paral-  
lel road are detected.  
▷
In the presence of country-specific road  
signs or road layouts.  
Speed control systems  
Principle  
The speed control systems provide support  
when driving.  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the speed con-  
trol systems include the following individual  
systems.  
Turn last active speed control sys-  
tem on/off.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 217.  
Interrupt and continue speed control  
systems.  
Distance Control, refer to page 219.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 226.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 231.  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, the individual systems are en-  
hanced with additional functions.  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
Some functions can be operated via voice con-  
trol.  
Set speed.  
Additional information:  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 59.  
Turning on/selecting speed control  
systems  
1.  
Turn on: press the button.  
2.  
Select: when the system is active,  
press the button repeatedly until the de-  
215  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
sired speed control system is displayed in  
the toolbar in the instrument cluster.  
Interrupting speed control systems  
manually  
Icon  
Speed control system  
▷
▷
Press the button.  
Cruise control.  
Press button to select another  
speed control system.  
Distance control.  
Continuing speed control systems  
Assisted Driving Mode: Cruise Control  
with Distance Control, Steering Assis-  
tance with lane keeping.  
Press the button.  
The activated system is shown in green.  
Turning off speed control systems  
automatically  
The speed control systems turn off automati-  
cally when the drive-ready state is turned off.  
The system is shown in white when the sys-  
tem can be activated.  
The system is grayed out if the system has  
failed or if the functional requirements are not  
met.  
Turning off speed control systems  
manually  
Interrupting speed control systems  
automatically  
Depending on the system, speed control  
systems are interrupted automatically, for in-  
stance in the following situations:  
Press and hold this button.  
The speed control systems are turned  
off and the displays extinguish.  
Adjusting speed values  
▷
When moving from selector lever position D  
to P, N, or R.  
Repeatedly press the rocker button on  
the steering wheel up or down until the  
desired value is set.  
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is limited.  
▷
▷
Each time the rocker button is pressed  
to the resistance point, the set speed in-  
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
"SPORT PLUS": the settings for increased  
driving dynamics are activated.  
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-  
ess.  
Each time the rocker button is pressed past  
the resistance point, the set speed changes  
by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
216  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Safety information  
Marking on speedometer  
Warning  
A mark for the set speed ap-  
pears on the speedometer.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive.  
▷
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted.  
▷
No marking: system is switched off.  
Notifications  
In addition to the respective indicator lights,  
notifications are displayed for some functions.  
Warning  
The scope of notifications can be set.  
The use of the system can lead to an in-  
creased risk of accidents in the following sit-  
uations, for instance:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
▷
▷
▷
On winding roads.  
With high traffic volume.  
On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet  
conditions, or on a loose road surface.  
6. "Notifications"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Only use the system if driving at  
constant speed is possible.  
Cruise Control  
Principle  
Warning  
With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad-  
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.  
The system maintains the set speed. The sys-  
tem accelerates and brakes automatically as  
needed.  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
General information  
The system can be activated starting at  
20 mph/30 km/h.  
Depending on the vehicle setting, the Cruise  
Control settings can change under certain  
conditions. For instance, the acceleration can  
change depending on the driving mode.  
217  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The driving mode changes or Dynamic Sta-  
bility Control activates when cruise control is  
switched on.  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Turning the speed control system  
off/interrupting  
The speed control system can be turned off or  
canceled automatically or manually.  
Button Function  
Turn last active speed control sys-  
tem on/off.  
Interrupt and continue speed control  
systems.  
Additional information:  
Speed control systems, refer to page 215.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
Adjusting the speed  
Store current speed.  
Store/maintain speed  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
Press the rocker button up or down  
once while the system is stopped.  
Set speed.  
When the system is switched on, the current  
speed is maintained and stored as the set  
speed.  
Turning on the Cruise Control  
In vehicles with distance control: change the  
mode of the Cruise Control to Cruise Control  
without distance control.  
The saved speed is shown on the speedome-  
ter.  
When the Speed Limit Assistant is not active,  
the current speed can also be stored by press-  
ing a button:  
Additional information:  
Distance Control, refer to page 219.  
Press the button.  
In vehicles without distance control: turn on the  
Cruise Control with the buttons on the steering  
wheel.  
Changing the speed  
Repeatedly press the rocker button up  
or down until the desired speed is set.  
1.  
If necessary, press the button.  
If active, the displayed speed is stored  
and the vehicle reaches the stored speed  
when the road is clear.  
2.  
If necessary, press the button re-  
peatedly until the Cruise Control is selected.  
The maximum speed that can be set depends  
on the vehicle.  
Cruise control is active. The current speed is  
maintained and stored as desired speed.  
Press rocker button to resistance point and  
hold: The vehicle accelerates or decelerates  
without the accelerator pedal being pressed.  
The indicator lights on the instrument cluster  
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is  
set to the current speed.  
After the rocker button is released, the vehicle  
maintains the final speed achieved. Pressing  
218  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
the switch beyond the resistance point causes  
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Marking on speedometer  
Continuing cruise control  
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive, the marking indicates  
the desired speed.  
At the stored speed  
▷
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted, the marking indi-  
cates the stored speed.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
▷
No marking: system is switched off.  
Indicator light  
Indicator light green: system is active.  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
by calling up the stored speed. The difference  
between the current speed and the stored  
speed should be as little as possible.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Depending on the equipment, some system  
information can also be displayed in the Head-  
up display.  
Press the button with the system inter-  
rupted.  
System limits  
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The  
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades  
if the drive power is insufficient.  
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-  
ues.  
In the following cases, the stored speed value  
is deleted and cannot be called up again:  
Depending on the driving mode, the vehicle  
may exceed or drop below the set desired  
speed in some situations; for instance, on  
downhill or uphill grades.  
▷
▷
When the system is switched off.  
When drive-ready state is switched off.  
At the current speed  
Do not use Cruise Control when towing.  
Press the rocker button up or down to  
continue cruise control at the current  
speed.  
Distance control  
Principle  
Speed Limit Assistant: at the  
suggested speed  
With the distance control, a distance to a vehi-  
cle driving ahead can be adjusted in addition to  
the Cruise Control.  
When a speed is suggested, press the  
button to accept the Cruise Control at  
the suggested speed.  
219  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
General information  
The system maintains the set speed on clear  
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto-  
matically.  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system  
adjusts the speed of the vehicle so that the set  
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained.  
The speed is adjusted as far as the given sit-  
uation allows.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
The distance can be adjusted at several levels.  
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec-  
tive speed.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a stand-  
still and then drives off again within a brief pe-  
riod, the system is able to detect this within the  
given system limits.  
Otherwise, drive off independently such as by  
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by press-  
ing the button for the speed setting on the  
steering wheel.  
Warning  
Safety information  
Risk of accident is greater when there is a  
high speed differential to other vehicles, for  
instance in the following situations:  
Warning  
▷
▷
▷
When approaching a slowly moving ve-  
hicle at speed.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Vehicle suddenly swerving into own  
lane.  
When approaching stationary vehicles at  
speed.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively  
intervene where appropriate  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
220  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Turning on Cruise Control with  
Distance Control  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
1.  
If necessary, press the button.  
Turn last active speed control sys-  
tem on/off.  
2.  
If necessary, press the button re-  
peatedly until distance control is selected.  
Interrupt and continue speed control  
systems.  
Cruise Control with Distance Control is active.  
The current speed is maintained and stored as  
desired speed.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
The selected distance to a vehicle driving  
ahead is maintained.  
Store current speed.  
The indicator lights on the instrument cluster  
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is  
set to the current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
Set speed.  
The driving mode changes or Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control activates when Distance Control is  
switched on.  
Sensors  
Adjusting the speed  
The speed can be set using the rocker button  
on the steering wheel.  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Additional information:  
Cruise control, refer to page 217.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 41.  
Interrupting Cruise Control with  
Distance Control automatically  
The system is stopped automatically in the fol-  
lowing situations, for example:  
Application range  
The system is best used on well-maintained  
roads.  
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-  
ess.  
The maximum speed that can be set is limited  
and depends, for example, on the vehicle and  
the vehicle equipment.  
▷
▷
▷
Selector lever position D is disengaged.  
While Dynamic Stability Control is limited.  
The system can also be activated when sta-  
tionary.  
"SPORT PLUS": the settings for increased  
driving dynamics are activated.  
Do not use Cruise Control and Distance Control  
when towing.  
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
Driver's seat belt and driver's door are  
opened.  
221  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
The system has not detected objects for  
an extended period, for instance on a  
road with very little traffic without curb or  
shoulder markings.  
The mark on the speedometer  
illuminates gray.  
▷
▷
The detection range of the radar is im-  
paired, for instance by contamination or  
heavy precipitation.  
The indicator light illuminates green.  
After a longer stationary period when the  
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the  
system.  
Cruise control can be continued as follows:  
▷
Pressing the accelerator pedal.  
Turning the speed control system  
off/interrupting  
The speed control system can be turned off or  
canceled automatically or manually.  
▷
Press the rocker button on the left  
side of the steering wheel.  
▷
Press the button on the left side of  
the steering wheel.  
Additional information:  
Speed control systems, refer to page 215.  
Distance  
Continuing cruise control while  
driving  
Safety information  
Warning  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the  
system limits, deceleration can be late. There  
may be a risk of accidents or risk of dam-  
age to property. Be aware of the surround-  
ing traffic situation at all times. Adjust the  
distance to the traffic and weather conditions  
and maintain the prescribed safety distance,  
possibly by braking.  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
by calling up the stored speed. The difference  
between the current speed and the stored  
speed should be as little as possible.  
Adjusting the distance  
Additional information:  
1.  
Apps menu  
Cruise control, refer to page 217.  
2. "Vehicle"  
Continuing cruise control while  
vehicle is stationary  
In certain situations, this system requires the  
driver to confirm their intention to drive off.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
6. "Distance control"  
The displays show the following:  
222  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
7. "Distance"  
6. "Distance control"  
7. "Switch to Cruise Control"  
8. Select the desired setting.  
The setting is reset when the vehicle is parked.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
General information  
Automatic adaptation of the distance  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version: the system can be set so that  
the distance to the vehicle in front is automati-  
cally adjusted within the set distance. The sys-  
tem takes into account the traffic situation and  
ambient conditions, e.g. poor visibility.  
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-  
plays in the instrument cluster may vary.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Marking on speedometer  
2. "Vehicle"  
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive, the marking indicates  
the desired speed.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
▷
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted, the marking indi-  
cates the stored speed.  
6. "Distance control"  
7. "Situational distance control"  
▷
No marking: system is switched off.  
Changing between Cruise Control  
with/without Distance Control  
Indicator lights and warning lights  
Icon  
Description  
Safety information  
White indicator light:  
No Distance Control because acceler-  
ator pedal is being pressed.  
Warning  
The system does not react to traffic driv-  
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the  
stored speed. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Adjust the set  
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as  
needed.  
Indicator light illuminates green:  
Vehicle has been detected ahead of  
you.  
The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle  
has been detected ahead of you.  
Indicator light flashes green:  
Changing over the Cruise Control mode  
Preceding vehicle has driven off.  
Turning Cruise Control without distance control  
on or off:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
223  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Distance too short.  
Icon  
Description  
Speed greater than approx.  
40 mph/70 km/h.  
Indicator light flashes gray:  
Conditions are not adequate for the  
system to work.  
System limits  
The system was deactivated but ap-  
plies the brakes until you actively  
resume control by pressing on the  
brake pedal or accelerator pedal.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 41.  
Warning light flashes red and acous-  
tic signal sounds:  
Radar sensors, refer to page 42.  
Brake and make an evasive maneu-  
ver, if necessary.  
Detection range  
Assisted View  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View in the central  
display area of the instrument cluster.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 152.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
The detection capability of the system and the  
automatic braking performance are limited.  
Set speed  
For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be  
detected.  
Depending on the equipment, some system  
information can also be displayed in the Head-  
up display.  
Deceleration  
The system does not decelerate in the follow-  
ing situations:  
Distance information  
The icon is displayed when the dis-  
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead  
is too short.  
▷
For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving  
road users.  
The distance information is active in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
▷
▷
For cross traffic.  
For oncoming traffic.  
▷
Cruise Control with Distance Control  
switched off.  
▷
Display in the Head-up display selected.  
Head-up display, refer to page 138.  
224  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Merging vehicles  
When you approach a curve the system may  
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due  
to the bend of the curve. If the system decel-  
erates you may compensate for it by briefly  
accelerating. After releasing the accelerator  
pedal the system is reactivated and controls  
speed independently.  
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly  
merges into your lane, the system may not be  
able to automatically restore the selected dis-  
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se-  
lected distance in certain situations, including if  
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles  
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly  
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving  
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system  
requests that the driver intervene by braking  
and making an evasive maneuver, if needed.  
Driving off  
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off  
automatically; for example:  
▷
▷
On steep uphill grades.  
In front of bumps in the road.  
Cornering  
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.  
Weather  
The following restrictions can occur under un-  
favorable weather or light conditions:  
▷
▷
Poorer vehicle detection.  
Short-term interruptions for vehicles that  
are already recognized.  
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-  
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-  
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering  
or making an evasive maneuver.  
When the set speed is too high for a curve,  
the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves  
may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a  
curve at an appropriate speed.  
Drive power  
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The  
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades  
if the drive power is insufficient.  
The system has a limited detection range. Sit-  
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi-  
cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be  
detected very late.  
Depending on the driving mode, the vehicle  
may exceed or drop below the set desired  
speed in some situations; for instance, on  
downhill or uphill grades.  
225  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Assisted Driving Mode  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Principle  
Assisted Driving Mode enhances Distance  
Control with Steering Assistance and lane  
keeping. The system assists the driver in keep-  
ing the vehicle within the lane. For this pur-  
pose, the system executes supporting steering  
movements, for instance when cornering.  
Button Function  
Turn last active speed control sys-  
tem on/off.  
Interrupt and continue speed control  
systems.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
General information  
Depending on the speed, the system orients  
itself according to the lane boundaries or vehi-  
cles in front.  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether  
the steering wheel is being touched.  
Set speed.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and  
national-market version, the Driver Attention  
Camera in the instrument cluster monitors the  
driver's attention.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Safety information  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Depending on the equipment:  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Depending on the equipment:  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Sensors in steering wheel.  
▷
▷
▷
Depending on the vehicle equipment and  
national-market version: Driver Attention  
Camera  
Additional information:  
The Cruise Control and Distance Control alerts  
also apply.  
▷
▷
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 41.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 207.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 217.  
Distance Control, refer to page 219.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Depending on the equipment: speed below  
130 mph/210 km/h or 110 mph/180 km/h.  
▷
Sufficient lane width.  
226  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Hands on the steering wheel rim.  
Sufficiently wide curve radius.  
Drive in the center of the lane.  
▷
Depending on the equipment: at a  
speed above 130 mph/210 km/h or  
110 mph/180 km/h.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
After releasing the steering wheel.  
With strong steering intervention.  
When leaving own lane.  
The sensor system calibration process is  
complete.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Distance control is active.  
When the turn signal is switched on or, de-  
pending on the vehicle equipment, when  
the driver turns the steering wheel while the  
turn signal is switched on.  
Seat belt on the driver's side fastened.  
Forward Collision Mitigation is active.  
Depending on the equipment:  
Side-collision warning is active.  
▷
▷
When the lane is too narrow.  
If a lane boundary is not detected and there  
is no vehicle driving in front.  
Switching on Assisted Driving Mode  
▷
▷
The Cruise Control with Distance Control is  
interrupted.  
1.  
If necessary, press the button.  
The seat belt on the driver's side is unfas-  
tened.  
2.  
If necessary, press the button re-  
peatedly until Assisted Driving Mode is se-  
lected.  
Indicator light illuminates gray.  
The system is on standby and does not  
manipulate steering movements.  
Indicator light illuminates gray.  
The system is on standby and does not  
manipulate steering movements.  
System activates automatically as soon as all  
function conditions are fulfilled.  
System activates automatically as soon as all  
function conditions are fulfilled.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
The indicator light illuminates green.  
Icon  
Description  
The system is active and helps to keep  
the vehicle in the lane.  
Indicator light illuminates gray:  
The system is ready.  
When the system is switched on, the Forward  
Collision Mitigation and, depending on the  
equipment, the side-collision warning are ac-  
tive.  
Indicator light illuminates green:  
The system is activated.  
The system supports the driver in  
keeping the vehicle within the lane.  
Stopping Assisted Driving Mode  
automatically  
The system interrupts the supporting steering  
movements automatically, for example in the  
following situations:  
Warning light flashes yellow and  
steering wheel vibrates:  
A lane boundary has been crossed.  
Warning light illuminates yellow and  
acoustic signal sounds:  
System interruption is imminent.  
227  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Description  
Displays on the steering wheel  
Icon  
Warning light flashes red and acous-  
tic signal sounds:  
The system is switched off or will be  
interrupted very soon.  
Warning light illuminates yellow:  
Hands are not grasping the steering  
wheel. The system is still active.  
Grab the steering wheel with your  
hands.  
Similar to the instrument cluster views, the two  
LEDs above the keypads illuminate.  
Warning light illuminates red, acous-  
tic signal sounds:  
The steering wheel displays can be turned on/  
off.  
The hands are not on the steering  
wheel or, depending on the vehicle  
equipment and national-market ver-  
sion, the driver's line of sight is not di-  
rected at the surrounding traffic. Sys-  
tem interruption is imminent.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
6. "Light elements"  
The system reduces the speed to a  
standstill if applicable.  
It is possible that the system will  
not execute any supporting steering  
movements.  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Depending on the equipment, the system in-  
formation can also be displayed in the Head-  
up display.  
Immediately grasp the steering wheel  
with your hands and pay attention to  
the surrounding traffic.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, a Check Control mes-  
sage is displayed if the Driver Attention Cam-  
era detects that the driver is inattentive.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View in the central  
display area of the instrument cluster.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
6. "Vibration intensity"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 152.  
This setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
228  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane  
boundaries.  
System limits  
General information  
The system cannot be activated or meaning-  
fully used in certain situations.  
Short-term interruptions in case of already  
detected vehicles and lane boundaries.  
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-  
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-  
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering  
or making an evasive maneuver.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Lane Change Assistant  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Principle  
The Lane Change Assistant also assists when  
changing lanes on multi-lane roads.  
General information  
The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode  
sensors.  
The Cruise Control and Distance Control alerts  
also apply.  
Additional information:  
Safety information  
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 217.  
Distance Control, refer to page 219.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 41.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 42.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 207.  
Hands on the steering wheel  
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering  
wheel contact in the following situations:  
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and  
the use of this function may be prohibited or  
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and  
local laws.  
▷
▷
Driving with gloves.  
Protective covers on the steering wheel.  
Weather  
The Assisted Driving Mode alerts also apply.  
Additional information:  
The following restrictions can occur under un-  
favorable weather or light conditions:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 226.  
229  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
To initiate the lane change, press the  
turn signal lever in the desired direction  
to the resistance point.  
Functional requirements  
▷
The functional requirements for Assisted  
Driving Mode have been met.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment,  
the turn signal lever can also be pressed  
beyond the resistance point.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 226.  
▷
▷
Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy-  
clists and with physical barriers to oncom-  
ing traffic such as crash barriers.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, after  
receiving a lane change suggestion,  
an automatic lane change can be initi-  
ated once the driver checks their field  
of vision to ensure that traffic permits  
the lane change. For this case, Lane  
Change Assistant must clearly recog-  
nize the driving situation and the Driver  
Attention Camera must clearly recog-  
nize the driver's line of sight.  
A vehicle has been detected at a sufficient  
distance behind your own vehicle since be-  
ginning the drive.  
▷
▷
Crossable lane boundaries are detected.  
Maximum speed approx.  
110 mph/180 km/h.  
▷
The minimum speed is country-specific.  
After a short time, Lane Change Assistant ini-  
tiates a lane change.  
Turning on/turning off Lane Change  
Assistant  
After the lane change, the system helps keep  
the vehicle in the new lane.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Canceling a lane change  
The lane change can be canceled by steering  
movement into the opposite direction or by op-  
erating the turn signal in the opposite direction.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
6. "Assisted Driving"  
7.  
▷
"Lane Change Assistant": Turning the  
Lane Change Assistant on/off.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
▷
"Active Lane Change": Depending on  
vehicle equipment and national-market  
version, lane changes can be done au-  
tomatically.  
Icon  
Description  
Steering wheel icon and lane change  
arrow icon are green:  
The system carries out a lane  
change.  
Changing lanes  
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits  
changing lanes.  
Steering wheel icon is green and line  
for lane marking on respective side is  
gray:  
2. Start the lane change.  
The system detected the lane change  
request. Lane change not currently  
possible.  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
230  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
displayed in the Assisted View in the central  
display area of the instrument cluster.  
cal or legal requirements. Further information  
about the availability of Assisted Driving Mode  
Plus can be requested from an authorized  
service center.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 152.  
Safety information  
System limits  
The limits of the Assisted Driving Mode system  
apply.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
The limits of the Driver Attention Camera sys-  
tem also apply to automatic lane changes.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 226.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 207.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
Principle  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus provides assis-  
tance when driving on highways.  
Warning  
This system is only intended for use on roads  
with structural separation from oncoming  
traffic, e.g., highways. Because of the system  
limits, the system can also remain active on  
roads without structural separations and may  
not react as expected. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Deactivate  
the system if it is enabled on roads without  
structural separations.  
The system increases driving comfort in suita-  
ble driving situations.  
Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether  
the steering wheel is being touched.  
Different versions of this function are available  
depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version.  
▷
Version for speeds up to approx.  
40 mph/60 km/h, e.g., traffic jam.  
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and  
the use of this function may be prohibited or  
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and  
local laws.  
▷
Version for speeds up to approx.  
85 mph/135 km/h.  
General information  
For versions up to 85 mph/135 km/h, the fol-  
lowing applies:  
The Assisted Driving Mode alerts also apply.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 226.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus will be active at the  
time of vehicle delivery and will only be avail-  
able for a limited period. Information about  
the duration of availability for Assisted Driving  
Mode Plus will be available prior to and at  
the time of vehicle sale. Assisted Driving Mode  
Plus may be terminated earlier due to techni-  
231  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
This function must be available on the road  
on which the vehicle is driving.  
Overview  
Sensors  
Antennas located in the roof must not be  
covered, e.g., by roof loads or snow.  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-  
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-  
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
For the version up to 40 mph/60 km/h, the fol-  
lowing additional functional requirements ap-  
ply:  
Side radar sensors, front.  
Side radar sensors, rear.  
The sensors in the steering wheel.  
Driver Attention Camera.  
▷
▷
A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.  
Speed below approx. 40 mph/60 km/h.  
The version up to 85 mph/135 km/h addition-  
ally uses the following sensors:  
For the version up to 85 mph/135 km/h, the  
following additional functional requirements  
apply:  
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
▷
Assisted Driving Mode Plus is enabled in  
the vehicle.  
Exterior mirror cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
▷
▷
The navigation data must be up to date.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle speed is less than approx.  
85 mph/135 km/h.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 41.  
▷
The systems in the vehicle, e.g., the At-  
tention Assistant and the Driver Attention  
Camera recognize that the driver is rested.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply to  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus:  
▷
Assisted Driving Mode Plus must be avail-  
able in the country in which the vehicle is  
driven.  
Switching Assisted Driving Mode  
Plus on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
▷
The functional requirements for Assisted  
Driving Mode have been met.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
Assisted Driving Mode is active and the  
LED displays on the steering wheel are  
switched on.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 226.  
6. "Assisted Driving"  
7. "Assisted Driving Plus"  
▷
Driving on a highway-like road without pe-  
destrians or cyclists and with physical barri-  
ers to oncoming traffic, e.g., guard rails.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus is automatically  
offered when Assisted Driving Mode is active  
and all functional requirements for Assisted  
Driving Mode Plus have been met.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Lane boundaries are detected.  
Sufficient lane width.  
Sufficiently wide curve radius.  
Two green LED lights are illuminated on the  
steering wheel.  
The navigation system must clearly identify  
the road and vehicle position.  
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is  
shown in green.  
232  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The system begins to assist the driver with  
vehicle control.  
Displays on the steering wheel  
When the system is switched on, the following  
functions are enabled:  
▷
▷
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation.  
Side collision mitigation.  
For the version up to 85 mph/135 km/h:  
Some speed control systems, e.g., adjust-  
ing speed to course of road.  
The two LEDs above the keypads illuminate  
depending on the situation.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Description  
▷
▷
Green: the system is active.  
Yellow: system will be interrupted.  
Grab the steering wheel with your hands.  
Red: system will be deactivated.  
Indicator light green: system is active.  
▷
Indicator light gray: the system has  
been interrupted and will activate au-  
tomatically as soon as all functional  
requirements are met.  
Grab the steering wheel immediately with  
your hands.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 226.  
White indicator light: the system can  
be activated.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Depending on the equipment, the system in-  
formation can also be displayed in the Head-  
up display.  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View in the central  
display area of the instrument cluster.  
Navigation system displays  
Additional information:  
For the version up to 85 mph/135 km/h, roads  
on which Assisted Driving Mode Plus supports  
vehicle control can be displayed on the naviga-  
tion system.  
Assisted View, refer to page 152.  
1.  
Navigation menu  
2. "Suggestions"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
System limits  
The system limits of the following systems ap-  
ply:  
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode.  
Driver Attention Camera.  
233  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
For version up to 85 mph/135 km/h: Fati-  
gue Alert  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Sensors of the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 226.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 207.  
Fatigue alert, refer to page 206.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 41.  
Speed Limit Assistant  
Principle  
Overview  
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the  
speed limit. A suggested speed can be ap-  
plied.  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
General information  
Accept suggested speed manually.  
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed  
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit,  
this new speed value can be applied for the  
following systems:  
Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control.  
Distance control.  
Turning Speed Limit Assistant  
on/off  
Assisted Driving Mode.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus.  
1.  
Apps menu  
The speed value is suggested as the new de-  
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed  
value, the corresponding system must be acti-  
vated.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
Safety information  
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"  
7. "Speed limits"  
Warning  
8. Select the desired setting:  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
234  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
"Adjust manually": detected speed limits  
can be applied manually.  
General information  
A speed adaptation for all speed limits and an  
additional speed adaptation for speed limits up  
to 40 mph/60 km/h can be set up.  
"Show current limit": current speed lim-  
its are displayed without being applied  
in the instrument cluster.  
The additional speed adaptation for speed lim-  
its up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or  
deactivated.  
▷
"Off": depending on the national-market  
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed  
Limit Assistant will be turned off.  
Setting the speed adjustment  
If necessary, other anticipatory comfort  
functions will be turned off.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Additional information:  
2. "Vehicle"  
Speed Limit Info, refer to page 213.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
A message is displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter when the system and a speed control sys-  
tem are activated.  
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"  
7. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Adjust speed limits": set the tolerance  
for speed adjustments, which applies to  
all speed limits.  
Icon  
Function  
Detected change of a speed limit with  
immediate effect.  
▷
▷
"2nd adjustm. up to": activate or deacti-  
vate additional speed adaptation.  
Depending on the national-market  
version, it is possible to switch be-  
tween the units of measurement.  
"Adjust speed limits": with activated  
additional speed adjustment, set the  
tolerance for speed limits up to  
40 mph/60 km/h.  
Indicator light illuminates green: the  
detected speed limit can be applied  
with the SET button.  
System limits  
Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed  
Limit Info system.  
After it has been applied, a green  
checkmark is displayed.  
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.  
Additional information:  
Manual adoption  
A detected speed limit can be applied man-  
ually to the active speed control system.  
▷
System limits of Speed Limit Info, refer to  
page 214.  
When the SET icon is displayed, press  
the button.  
▷
System limits of the sensors, refer to  
page 41.  
Speed adjustment  
Principle  
It can be adjusted whether the speed limit is  
applied exactly or with a tolerance.  
235  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirements  
Adapting the speed to the  
route  
▷
Cruise Control and distance control are acti-  
vated.  
▷
▷
Driving on a highway or highway-like road.  
Principle  
With navigation system: guidance is acti-  
vated.  
The system can be configured so that with  
active distance control, the vehicle adapts the  
speed automatically to the route.  
The use of navigation software via Apple  
CarPlay or Android Auto may lead to func-  
tional limitations, for instance deviations  
with navigation instructions.  
For instance, the speed will be reduced in the  
following situations as necessary:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Before making turns.  
Before a roundabout.  
Before a curve.  
▷
The function must be available in the coun-  
try in which the vehicle is driven.  
Adapting speed automatically to  
route  
In front of an exit ramp on highways or  
highway-like roads.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Safety information  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
Warning  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
6. "Route and intersection assistant"  
7. "Automatically adjust speed to route"  
Adjusting the cornering speed  
The cornering speed can be adjusted depend-  
ing on national-market version.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
The Cruise Control, Distance Control, Assisted  
Driving Mode, and Speed Limit Assist alerts  
also apply.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
Additional information:  
6. "Route and intersection assistant"  
7. "Cornering speed"  
8. Select the desired setting.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 217.  
Distance Control, refer to page 219.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 226.  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 234.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
236  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
displayed in the Assisted View in the central  
display area of the instrument cluster.  
Safety information  
Additional information:  
Warning  
Assisted View, refer to page 152.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
System limits  
Depending on the national-market version or  
country in which the vehicle is currently being  
driven, the function may not be available.  
The system does not react or reacts to a lim-  
ited extent to the route ahead in the following  
situations:  
▷
If the vehicle location cannot be clearly de-  
termined by the navigation system.  
The Cruise Control, Distance Control, and As-  
sisted Driving alerts also apply.  
▷
On wintry roads.  
Additionally, the limits for Cruise Control, Dis-  
tance Control, Assisted Driving, and Speed  
Limit Assist systems apply.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 217.  
Distance Control, refer to page 219.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 226.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 217.  
Distance Control, refer to page 219.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 226.  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 234.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Cruise Control and Distance Control are ac-  
tivated.  
▷
▷
Driving on a highway or highway-like road.  
A situation-dependent minimum speed has  
been reached.  
Lane change with active  
guidance  
▷
▷
▷
The system detects a sufficiently large gap  
in traffic in the adjacent lane.  
Principle  
A crossable lane boundary on the side of  
the desired lane change is detected.  
Lane change with active guidance assists the  
driver when lane changes are necessary to  
reach a destination. A notice is also displayed  
on the instrument cluster. A slight jolt can also  
be felt on the steering wheel, depending on  
national-market version and settings.  
Destination guidance is active on the navi-  
gation system.  
The function is not available when using  
navigation software via Apple CarPlay or  
Android Auto.  
▷
▷
The function must be available in the coun-  
try in which the vehicle is driven.  
General information  
The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode  
sensors.  
The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-  
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-  
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.  
237  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
3. A Check Control message indicates a lane  
change suggestion.  
Switching lane change on/off with  
active destination guidance  
4. When the traffic situation permits a lane  
change, the driver can steer the vehicle into  
the next lane.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
For vehicles equipped with Lane Change  
Assistant: Once the Check Control message  
appears, the Lane Change Assistant can be  
started by, e.g., operating the turn signal or  
looking toward the lane to check it.  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
6. "Route and intersection assistant"  
7. "Lane Guiding with Navigation"  
5. If necessary, the system automatically  
starts additional lane changes.  
Switching the steering wheel jerk  
on/off  
You can switch the steering wheel jerk assis-  
tance on/off.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Function  
1.  
Apps menu  
Indicates a necessary lane change.  
The icon varies depending on the  
traffic situation.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
A green checkmark on the icon indi-  
cates that the function is active.  
A red cross on the icon indicates that  
the system cannot assist with the  
lane change.  
6. "Route and intersection assistant"  
7. "Steering wheel impulse"  
Changing lanes  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the traffic situation is displayed  
in Assisted View on the instrument cluster.  
If lane changes are necessary to reach a nav-  
igation destination, a corresponding notice is  
displayed on the instrument cluster. In addi-  
tion, a slight jerk can be felt on the steering  
wheel.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 152.  
To change lanes, follow the instructions on the  
instrument cluster.  
System limits  
The limits of the Cruise Control, Distance Con-  
trol, and Assisted Driving Mode systems and  
Driver Attention Camera apply.  
1.  
The system detects a suitable gap  
in the flow of traffic in the adjacent lane. A  
green checkmark is displayed on the lane  
change icon on the instrument cluster. The  
system prepares for the lane change.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 217.  
Distance Control, refer to page 219.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 226.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 207.  
2. When a suitable gap is detected, the speed  
is adapted so that the vehicle remains level  
with the opening.  
238  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
▷
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 255.  
Vehicle features and options  
▷
▷
▷
Maneuver Assistant, refer to page 260.  
Remote Control Parking, refer to page 263.  
Back-up Assistant, refer to page 264.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Safety information  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Parking assistance systems  
General information  
The parking assistance systems include differ-  
ent individual systems. The individual systems  
help the driver when parking, maneuvering, or  
reversing by providing various assistance func-  
tions, sensors, and camera views.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Rearview camera, refer to page 244.  
Semi-automatic camera perspective, refer  
to page 245.  
Overview  
▷
Automatic camera perspective, refer to  
page 245.  
Button in the vehicle  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Side view, refer to page 246.  
3D view, refer to page 246.  
Car wash view, refer to page 247.  
Panorama View, refer to page 247.  
Automatic activation of panorama view, re-  
fer to page 248.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Door opening angle, refer to page 249.  
Remote 3D View, refer to page 249.  
Park Distance Control, refer to page 250.  
Park assistance button  
Active Park Distance Control, refer to  
page 253.  
Sensors  
▷
Drive-off monitoring, refer to page 254.  
The parking assistance systems are controlled  
by the following sensors:  
239  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, one or more  
cameras capture the area from different se-  
lectable perspectives.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
Front camera.  
Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround-  
ings or a part of it is depicted.  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Depending on the national-market version, ei-  
ther the automatic or the semi-automatic cam-  
era perspective is displayed.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 41.  
Operating concept  
Turning display on/off  
The camera-based individual systems are op-  
erated with the function bars on the control  
display. The camera views can be viewed by  
selecting the appropriate icon.  
General information  
The parking assistance systems view switches  
off automatically when driving forwards or if a  
certain distance or speed is exceeded.  
In the Parking menu, some parking assistance  
systems can be configured individually.  
With reverse gear  
Some parking assistance systems can be  
started by voice control as needed, e.g., driving  
in/out of a parking space with the Automatic  
Parking Assistant.  
When drive-ready state is switched on, the dis-  
play is automatically switched on if selector  
lever position R is engaged.  
Additional information:  
With the Park Assist key  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 59.  
Press the button.  
Calling up Park menu  
1.  
Apps menu  
Via iDrive  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Apps menu  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Parking"  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The instrument cluster shows displays of some  
parking assistance systems such as Park Dis-  
tance Control or Automatic Parking Assistant.  
6. Select the desired settings.  
Display  
Principle  
With the Park Distance Control display and  
various camera views, the parking assistance  
systems help you park, maneuver, and reverse  
your vehicle.  
240  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Parking view  
1
Status of parking assistance systems  
Assisted View  
2
3
1
Toolbar, left  
Selection menu  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Camera image  
Selection window  
Display on the control display  
Automatic camera perspective  
Semi-automatic camera perspective  
Side view  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment and on the  
activated parking assistance system, the con-  
trol display will vary.  
Toolbar, right  
Toolbar, left  
Assistance view  
Different views and settings can be selected  
via the left toolbar depending on the equip-  
ment:  
▷
"Parking view"  
Depending on vehicle equipment, camera  
views or the Park Distance Control view are  
displayed.  
▷
"Assist view"  
A stylized top view of the vehicle is dis-  
played.  
1
Toolbar, left  
▷
▷
"Panorama view"  
The cross traffic view is displayed.  
"More"  
2
3
4
Camera image  
Vehicle top view  
Toolbar, right  
▷
▷
▷
"3D view"  
A three-dimensional view of the vehicle  
is displayed.  
"Car wash view"  
Your own lane can be displayed to make  
it easier to drive into a car wash.  
"Camera cleaning"  
241  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Cleaning of the front camera and rear-  
view camera can be switched on as  
needed.  
Icon  
Meaning  
No search for parking assistance  
system offers.  
▷
"Settings"  
No other parking assistance sys-  
tems available.  
Settings can be entered in the Park  
menu.  
Parking assistance systems have  
failed.  
Toolbar, right  
The Parking Assistant functions are displayed  
in the right toolbar.  
Search for parking assistance sys-  
tem offers is active.  
▷
▷
Status of the parking assistance systems.  
White: an available maneuver is se-  
lected but is not being performed.  
Functional requirements have not  
been met or the functions transfer  
has been completed.  
Available parking methods of the Automatic  
Parking Assistant.  
▷
▷
▷
Functions of the Back-up Assistant.  
Functions of the Maneuver Assistant.  
Green: parking assistance system is  
active. Functions are controlled de-  
pending on the system activated.  
Additional information in case of malfunc-  
tions.  
Maneuver Assistant records the  
maneuver to be stored.  
Status of parking assistance  
systems  
The status of parking assistance systems is  
indicated by icons on the toolbar on the right of  
the control display, in the status area on the in-  
strument cluster, and on the Head-up display,  
depending on vehicle equipment. In addition  
to this icon, text also appears on the control  
display.  
Additional displays  
General information  
Additional displays can be shown in the cam-  
era image of the display of the parking assis-  
tance systems, e.g., parking aid lines, to make  
parking and maneuvering easier.  
The following parking assistance systems are  
displayed:  
Several additional displays can be active at the  
same time.  
▷
▷
▷
Automatic Parking Assistant.  
Maneuver Assistant.  
Turning additional displays on/off  
Back-up Assistant.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
242  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Using parking aid lines  
Parking aid lines  
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning  
circle line leads to within the limits of the  
parking space.  
Pathway lines  
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where  
the green pathway line covers the corre-  
sponding turning circle line.  
Obstacle marking  
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space  
required when parking and maneuvering on  
level roads.  
Lane lines are displayed in front of or behind  
the vehicle depending on the gear engaged.  
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted  
to the steering movements depending on the  
steering-wheel angle.  
Obstacles are detected by the sensors.  
The obstacles detected by the Park Distance  
Control are shown by marks in the camera im-  
age.  
Turning circle lines  
Colored gradients for the obstacle markings in  
green, yellow and red indicate the distances.  
Functional limitations  
The system can be used only to a limited ex-  
tent in the following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
With a door open.  
With open cargo area.  
With exterior mirrors folded in.  
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed  
on the camera image together with pathway  
lines.  
Areas with gray hatching with an icon in the  
camera image identify areas that are currently  
not shown such as an open door.  
The lines show the course of the smallest pos-  
sible turning circle on a level road.  
Only one turning circle line is displayed after  
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-  
gle.  
243  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
Rearview camera  
Safety information  
Principle  
The rearview camera helps when reverse  
parking and maneuvering. The area behind the  
vehicle is shown on the control display.  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Additional views can be shown on the display,  
e.g., parking aid lines and obstacle markings.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Functional requirements  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
The trunk is fully closed.  
▷
The camera area is clean and clear.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 41.  
Turning the rearview camera on/off  
Field of view  
Turning the camera view on  
automatically  
Because of the camera angle, the areas under  
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.  
When drive-ready state is switched on, the  
rearview camera is automatically switched on  
if selector lever position R is engaged.  
Detection of objects  
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding  
objects such as ledges may not be detected by  
the system.  
Turning the camera view off  
automatically  
The rearview camera turns off automatically  
when driving forward or when a certain dis-  
tance or speed is exceeded.  
Objects shown on the control display may be  
closer than they appear. Do not estimate the  
distance to the objects on the control display.  
The camera's detection range can be limited  
by protruding cargo or a rear carrier.  
Turning the camera view on/off  
manually  
Malfunction  
A camera failure is displayed on the control  
display.  
1.  
Press the button.  
The malfunctioning camera's detection range  
is shown by the shaded area on the control  
display.  
2. Engage selector lever position R.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: The  
icon in the selection window is selected au-  
tomatically.  
244  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
To exit rearview camera view, select an-  
other camera view in the selection window  
or press the button again.  
General information  
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view  
changes to a fixed display of the area in front  
of or behind the bumper, or switches to side  
Park Distance Control as necessary.  
Deactivated rearview camera  
When the rearview camera is deactivated, for  
instance when the trunk is open, the camera  
image is displayed with gray shading.  
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic  
camera perspective is, if necessary, exited and  
the system uses a semi-automatic camera  
perspective to the rear. If necessary, select the  
automatic camera perspective when reverse  
gear is engaged. The automatic camera per-  
spective will then be maintained for the current  
parking operation.  
Semi-automatic camera  
perspective  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Principle  
Depending on the parking direction and en-  
gaged selector lever position, a fixed camera  
perspective is displayed with the areas in front  
of or behind the vehicle.  
Turning the automatic camera  
perspective on/off  
Turning the camera view on/off  
automatically  
When the parking assistance systems' display  
is turned on, automatic camera perspective is  
selected automatically.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Turning the semi-automatic camera  
perspective on/off  
The icon in the selection window is selected  
automatically.  
To exit the steering-dependent camera view,  
select another camera view in the selection  
window.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2.  
Select the icon in the selection window.  
To exit the fixed camera view, select an-  
other camera view in the selection window.  
Turning the camera view on/off  
manually  
Automatic camera  
perspective  
1.  
Press the button.  
2.  
The icon in the selection window is se-  
lected automatically.  
Principle  
To exit the steering-dependent camera  
view, select another camera view in the se-  
lection window or press the button again.  
The automatic camera perspective shows a  
steering-dependent view in the respective driv-  
ing direction.  
This perspective adapts to the respective driv-  
ing situation.  
245  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Side protection  
Side view  
Principle  
Principle  
The side Park Distance Control is automati-  
cally displayed when the automatic camera  
perspective is turned on. The function shows  
obstacles located next to the vehicle.  
Side view shows the vehicle's side surround-  
ings, making it easier to position the vehicle at  
the curb or with other obstacles on the side.  
The side view looks from rear to front and, in  
case of danger, focuses automatically on pos-  
sible obstacles.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Display  
Turning the side view on/off  
The selection window lets you choose the side  
view for the left or right side of the vehicle.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2.  
Select the icon for the desired vehicle  
side in the selection window.  
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle  
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-  
hicle.  
To exit the side view, select another cam-  
era view in the selection window.  
▷
▷
No markings: no obstacles detected.  
Color marks: warning against detected ob-  
stacles.  
3D view  
Principle  
System limits  
The system only displays stationary obstacles  
that were previously detected by sensors while  
passing them.  
With 3D view, a circle is displayed around the  
vehicle top view in the selection window.  
Specified perspectives can be selected on the  
circle.  
The system does not detect whether an obsta-  
cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand-  
still, the marks are not shown anymore in the  
display after a certain time. The area next to  
the vehicle must be newly captured.  
General information  
The current perspective is marked with a cam-  
era icon.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
246  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
This view can be used to position the vehicle  
correctly within the washing system guide rails.  
Turning the 3D view on/off  
In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll  
freely forward.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. "More"  
Additional information:  
3. "3D view"  
To exit the 3D view, select another camera  
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to  
page 125.  
view on the left toolbar.  
Panorama View  
Car wash view  
Principle  
Principle  
The panoramic view gives you an earlier view  
of crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and  
intersections.  
The car wash view assists when entering a car  
wash.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
General information  
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left  
and right of the vehicle can only be detected  
relatively late from the driver's seat. To pro-  
vide greater visibility, the front camera and, de-  
pending on vehicle equipment, rearview cam-  
era cover the side of the vehicle.  
Turning the car wash view on/off  
1.  
Press the button.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, this func-  
tion can turn on automatically when activation  
points are saved.  
2. "More"  
3. "Car wash view"  
To exit the car wash view, select a different  
camera view in the left toolbar.  
The camera image shows different levels of  
distortion in some areas and is thus not suita-  
ble for distance estimations.  
Display  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the function  
can be used when driving forward or in re-  
verse.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following cam-  
eras:  
▷
▷
Rearview camera.  
Your own lane is displayed for easier driving  
into a car wash.  
Depending on the equipment: front camera.  
247  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Turning the panoramic view on/off  
Functional requirements  
▷
A GPS signal must be received.  
▷
Depending on national-market version: A  
BMW ID or driver profile must be activated.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. "Panorama view"  
▷
▷
The reversing camera and front camera  
must be installed.  
To exit panorama view, select another  
camera view on the left toolbar.  
The direction of travel, selector lever posi-  
tion, and vehicle angle must correspond to  
a stored activation point.  
Display  
Storing activation points  
1. Drive your vehicle to the location where you  
want the system to turn on, then stop.  
2.  
Press the button.  
3. "Panorama view"  
4. "Activation point"  
Yellow lines on the screen display identify the  
bumpers of your own vehicle.  
The current position is displayed.  
5. "Save activation point"  
When reverse gear is engaged, the reversing  
camera view is displayed. Depending on ve-  
hicle equipment, the front camera view is dis-  
played when forward gear is engaged.  
Activation points are saved with the following  
information, for example:  
▷
▷
▷
With the city/town.  
With the city/town and the street.  
With the GPS coordinates.  
Automatic activation of  
panorama view  
You can rename the location and street infor-  
mation created automatically.  
Using activation points  
Principle  
The use of activation points can be switched  
on and off.  
Positions at which panorama view should  
switch on automatically can be saved as acti-  
vation points.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
General information  
Up to ten activation points can be stored.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
The activation points can be used when driv-  
ing forward and, depending on national-mar-  
ket version, when reversing.  
6. "GPS-based"  
Follow instructions in the Parking assistance  
systems chapter.  
248  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Editing activation points  
You can rename or delete specific activation  
points or all of them.  
System limits  
The system does not provide a warning of ap-  
proaching road users.  
The vehicle's surroundings are distorted in the  
display for technical reasons.  
1.  
Press the button.  
Even if the door opening angle indicator on the  
control display does not overlap with any other  
objects, it is necessary to park carefully next to  
other objects.  
2. "Panorama view"  
3. "Manage points"  
A list of all saved activation points is dis-  
played.  
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding  
objects may be closer than they appear on the  
control display.  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Door opening angle  
Remote 3D View  
Principle  
Principle  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the door  
opening angle display is shown automatically  
when stationary.  
The My BMW App and camera views in park-  
ing view such as automatic camera perspec-  
tive enable you to display the vehicle’s sur-  
roundings on a mobile device.  
This display helps estimate how far the doors  
can be opened when parking.  
The function displays a snapshot of the situa-  
tion.  
If obstacle marking is activated, the parking  
view indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the  
opening angles of the doors.  
General information  
For reasons of data protection, the function  
can only be used three times within two hours.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Display  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following cam-  
eras:  
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Data transfer must be activated.  
The maximum opening angle of the doors is  
displayed in selector lever position P.  
249  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Data protection, refer to page 73.  
Park Distance Control  
▷
▷
The My BMW App must be installed on the  
mobile end device.  
Principle  
ConnectedDrive countries: a BMW ID with  
an existing ConnectedDrive account must  
be activated.  
Park Distance Control assists with parking.  
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles  
in front of or behind the vehicle.  
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 74.  
Obstacles that are detected by the side ultra-  
sonic sensors can also be reported.  
Activating/deactivating Remote 3D  
View  
The function can be activated or deactivated  
individually or together with other functions.  
General information  
The range of the system, depending on obsta-  
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.  
6 ft/2 m.  
1.  
Apps menu  
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im-  
pending collision at a distance to the object of  
approx. 27 in/70 cm.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic  
warning is issued as early as a distance to the  
object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
After activation, Remote 3D View can be  
accessed using the My BMW App.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Functional limitations  
The system may not be fully operational or  
may not be available in the following situa-  
tions:  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
With a door or the cargo area open. Dark  
fields in the display indicate areas that are  
not recorded by the system.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
▷
With manually folded-in exterior mirrors.  
When other camera functions are being  
performed in the vehicle.  
▷
▷
The vehicle moves faster than walking  
speed.  
In case of missing or weak Internet connec-  
tion.  
Warning  
Due to high speeds when the Park Distance  
Control is activated, the warning can be de-  
layed due to physical circumstances. There is  
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
250  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid  
driving off quickly while Park Distance Control  
is not yet active.  
▷
▷
On: the LED illuminates.  
Off: the LED goes out.  
If the system is manually switched on when  
the reverse gear is engaged, the rearview  
camera image is displayed.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system cannot be turned off manually when  
the reverse gear is engaged.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
Acoustic warning  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
General information  
Turning Park Distance Control  
on/off  
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle  
is approaching an object. E.g., when an object  
is detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a  
sound is heard from the rear left speaker.  
Turning on the system automatically  
The system switches on automatically in the  
following situations:  
The shorter the distance to the object, the  
shorter the intervals of the intermittent tones.  
▷
When drive-ready state is switched on  
when selector lever position R is engaged.  
When the distance to a detected object is less  
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is  
sounded.  
▷
While approaching detected obstacles  
if the speed is lower than approx.  
When there are objects in front of and behind  
the vehicle at the same time, at a distance  
smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating  
continuous tone will sound between the front  
and rear speakers.  
2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance  
depends on the situation in question.  
The automatic activation of detected obstacles  
can be activated or deactivated.  
1.  
Apps menu  
The intermittent tones and the continuous tone  
are turned off when selector lever position P is  
engaged.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
Depending on national-market version, the in-  
termittent tones are switched off after a short  
time when the vehicle is stationary.  
6. "Automatic PDC activation"  
If an object approaches when the vehicle is  
stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.  
Turning off the system automatically  
Adjusting the volume  
The volume of the acoustic warning can be  
adjusted.  
When driving forward, the system turns off au-  
tomatically as needed when a certain distance  
or speed is exceeded.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Turning the system on/off manually  
2. "Vehicle"  
Press the button.  
3. "Driving settings"  
251  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
Display  
Depending on vehicle equipment, warnings  
may be displayed in front of, next to, and be-  
hind the vehicle.  
6. "PDC signal volume"  
7. Set the desired value.  
Depending on national-market  
version: Turn off acoustic warning  
Depending on national-market version, the  
acoustic warning can be turned off while per-  
forming a parking maneuver.  
Press  
the icon in the status field at the top  
of the control display.  
When the Park Distance Control is switched  
on again, the acoustic warning is automatically  
switched on again.  
Example display of warnings behind the vehi-  
cle.  
Visual warning  
General information  
The approach to an object is displayed on the  
control display and in the instrument cluster as  
soon as the system is activated.  
Objects that are farther away are already dis-  
played before a signal sounds.  
Example display of warnings next to the vehi-  
cle.  
Depending on the view, pathway lines, turning  
circle lines and obstacle markings are shown  
for a better estimation of the space required.  
▷
▷
Shaded area: Sensor detection range.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the sensor  
detection range is shown by the shaded, ring-  
shaped area. Green, yellow, and red markings  
indicate when obstacles are detected within  
the detection range.  
Gray shaded area: No obstacles have been  
detected within the detection range.  
▷
▷
Colored marks in shaded area: Obstacles  
have been detected within the detection  
range.  
If vehicle is equipped with Cross Traffic Warn-  
ing: A warning is also shown on the display for  
vehicles approaching from the side at the rear  
and front.  
Shaded area interrupted: the area next to  
the vehicle has not yet been detected.  
System limits  
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle  
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-  
hicle.  
General information  
The function for protecting the vehicle sides  
only shows stationary obstacles that were pre-  
viously detected by the sensors when passing  
by.  
252  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
The system does not detect whether an obsta-  
cle moves later on. When the vehicle is station-  
ary, the gray shaded areas on the sides are  
hidden after a certain time. The area on the  
side of the vehicle must be newly captured.  
Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts the  
brake intervention. Emergency braking is not  
performed.  
After emergency braking to a stop, further  
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Pro-  
ceed with caution. To move forward, lightly  
press the accelerator pedal and release as  
needed.  
Also follow the information on system limits in  
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.  
Unwarranted warnings  
Reaching the system limits can cause unwar-  
ranted warnings.  
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer,  
the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possi-  
ble at any time.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance  
in car washes, turn off automatic Park Dis-  
tance Control activation on obstacle detection.  
Safety information  
Malfunction  
An icon is displayed on the control dis-  
play.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: The  
sensor detection range may not be shown on  
the control display.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Park Distance Control malfunction. Have the  
vehicle checked by an authorized service cen-  
ter or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Active Park Distance Control  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Principle  
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumpers.  
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
The Park Distance Control brake function ini-  
tiates emergency braking if there is an acute  
risk of collision.  
Deactivating Active Park Distance  
Control temporarily  
After emergency braking, the function can be  
temporarily deactivated on the control display.  
A corresponding message is displayed.  
General information  
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre-  
vented under all circumstances.  
The function is available below walking speed  
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.  
1. "Configure"  
2. "Deactivate temporarily"  
253  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
During continued driving in this surrounding  
situation, no further emergency braking will  
occur.  
When obstacles are detected behind the vehi-  
cle, the system will brake.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
The function is automatically reactivated when  
Park Distance Control is switched on again.  
Safety information  
Settings  
It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle  
will be protected by the system.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
6. "Active PDC emergency braking"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Display  
Sensors  
As soon as the system engages, an  
icon is displayed with a corresponding  
message.  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
System limits  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Selector lever position D, B or R is engaged  
when the vehicle is stationary.  
Obstacles in the immediate vicinity are de-  
tected in front of or behind the vehicle.  
Drive-off monitoring  
The accelerator pedal is heavily applied,  
nearly to the end point.  
Principle  
In case of a risk of collision, the start-up mon-  
itoring reduces the drive power when driving  
off.  
The accelerator pedal is immediately ap-  
plied after engaging the selector lever posi-  
tion and obstacle detection.  
General information  
Turning drive-off monitoring on/off  
When obstacles are detected in close range in  
front of the vehicle, the acceleration will be re-  
duced. If necessary, this permits timely manual  
braking.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
254  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
In addition, the system makes it easier to  
park out of parallel and perpendicular parking  
spaces.  
6. "Drive off monitoring"  
7. "Drive off monitoring"  
The ultrasonic sensors measure both sides of  
the vehicle when driving slowly forward. Suita-  
ble parking spaces are calculated based on the  
objects detected, e.g., parking vehicles. The  
system status is displayed.  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically turned on again at the  
next drive.  
The system calculates the best possible park-  
ing line for driving in or out of parking spaces,  
and takes control of the vehicle while parking.  
Canceling reduced drive power  
The reduction of the drive power is canceled in  
the following situations:  
The operating principle and operation of the  
system is divided into the following steps:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking space search.  
Turning on.  
▷
▷
The accelerator pedal is released.  
After the accelerator pedal has been de-  
pressed completely twice.  
Parking.  
Driving out of parking spaces.  
▷
A specific distance has been traveled.  
The parking manoeuver while parking is per-  
formed automatically.  
If the reduction in drive power is canceled by  
covering a certain distance, the drive power is  
released gradually.  
When driving out of parallel parking spaces,  
the vehicle maneuvers automatically until it  
reaches a position where it can be driven out  
of the parking space without further steering  
movements.  
Display  
As soon as the system engages, an  
icon is displayed with a corresponding  
message.  
When driving out of perpendicular parking  
spaces, the vehicle is maneuvered out of the  
parking space to enable continued driving in  
the desired direction.  
System limits  
The Automatic Parking Assistant Professional  
increases the comfort and range of uses of  
the Automatic Parking Assistant. In addition to  
the parking methods of the Automatic Parking  
Assistant, parking in parking spaces that are  
marked with lines is possible.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
With Park Assist Professional, the parking ma-  
neuver can also be performed using Remote  
Control Parking on a smartphone.  
Automatic Parking Assistant  
Principle  
Automatic Parking Assistant provides support  
when parallel parking and parking transverse  
to the road.  
Vehicle features and options  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market version  
or the option for later enabling and software  
255  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
updates. This also applies to individual func-  
tions of the system.  
For information on whether a function is cur-  
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-  
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Parallel parking: reverse parking parallel to the  
road.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Perpendicular parking: reverse or forward  
parking perpendicular to the road.  
Warning  
The system can steer the vehicle over or  
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Watch surrounding  
traffic closely and actively intervene where  
appropriate  
Driving out of parallel parking spaces.  
Parking methods  
Park Assist supports the following functions:  
Driving out of perpendicular parking spaces.  
256  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Perpendicular parking:  
▷
▷
▷
Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a  
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.  
Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle  
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.  
Minimum depth: own vehicle length.  
The depth of perpendicular parking spaces  
must be estimated by the driver. Due to  
technical limitations, the system is only able  
to approximate the depth of perpendicular  
parking spaces.  
Park Assist Professional: Parking in parking  
spaces with parking lines.  
Parking lines for Park Assist Professional:  
Sensors  
The parking space must be clearly marked  
with lines.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is controlled  
by the following sensors:  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
Parking operation  
▷
Doors and cargo area are closed.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
▷
Driver's seat belt is fastened.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant Professional  
is additionally controlled by the following cam-  
eras:  
Leaving parking spaces  
▷
The vehicle was parked using the Auto-  
matic Parking Assistant, and an object has  
been detected in the area around the vehi-  
cle.  
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
▷
The vehicle was manually parked in re-  
verse, and objects have been detected in  
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. The  
distance to a detected curb is at least 6 in-  
ches/15 cm.  
Functional requirements  
Measurement of parking spaces  
▷
Maximum speed while driving forward ap-  
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.  
▷
The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m  
longer than the vehicle.  
▷
Maximum distance to row of parked vehi-  
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.  
Displays  
Suitable parking space  
Longitudinal parking:  
General information  
The current status of parking assistance sys-  
tems is shown on the right-hand toolbar, on  
the instrument cluster, and on the Head-up  
display, depending on vehicle equipment.  
▷
▷
Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a  
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.  
Minimum length of gap between two ob-  
jects: own vehicle length plus approx.  
2.6 ft/0.8 m.  
Different icons are shown on the control dis-  
play for selecting the parking method.  
▷
Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
257  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
The sequence of the displayed icons corre-  
sponds to the prioritized parking option.  
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and a distance of  
max. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
The direction of the arrow changes for the  
icons for parking methods for driving out of a  
parking space.  
The parking space search is activated.  
2. Press the  
gear.  
button or engage reverse  
Icon  
Meaning  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
Reverse lengthwise parking, right.  
Reverse lengthwise parking, left.  
Reverse perpendicular parking.  
Forward perpendicular parking.  
The status of the parking space search and  
possible parking spaces are displayed on  
the control display and in the instrument  
cluster.  
3. On the control display: Select one of the  
parking maneuvers offered. You can switch  
to another parking maneuver as necessary.  
Turning parking operation display  
on/off  
When the Automatic Parking Assistant is ac-  
tive, the parking operation is displayed in the  
camera image on the control display.  
In the instrument cluster: select suggested  
parking method with the knurled wheel on  
the steering wheel.  
Green: the system takes control of the  
parking operation.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play or in the instrument cluster.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
The speed can be reduced with the brake.  
Other interventions will cancel the system.  
6. "Show assistance info"  
Depending on national-market version, an  
intermittent or continuous tone sounds for  
Park Distance Control.  
Turning the signal tone on/off  
The signal tone for suitable parking spaces  
can be turned on and off.  
At the end of the parking operation, selec-  
tor lever position P is set.  
The end of the parking operation is indi-  
cated on the control display and in the in-  
strument cluster.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if  
needed.  
6. "Sound when available"  
Driving out of a parking space using  
the Automatic Parking Assistant  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
Parking using the Automatic  
Parking Assistant  
1. For the parking space search when driving  
past parked vehicles at a speed of up to  
2.  
With the vehicle at a standstill, press  
button or engage reverse gear.  
258  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
▷
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
3. On the control display: select the desired  
parking method.  
When operating the accelerator pedal or  
the selector lever.  
In the instrument cluster: select suggested  
parking method with the knurled wheel on  
the steering wheel.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When setting the parking brake.  
When unfastening the driver's seat belt.  
With open cargo area.  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play or in the instrument cluster.  
With open hood.  
With the doors open.  
Green: the system takes control of ma-  
neuvering.  
During activation or intervention by driver  
assistance systems.  
The speed can be reduced with the brake.  
Other interventions will cancel the system.  
▷
▷
When changing over to another function on  
the control display.  
A message will be displayed at the end of  
the maneuver.  
When the view on the control display is  
overlaid with messages.  
5. Make sure that the traffic situation permits  
driving out of parking space and driving off  
as usual.  
▷
▷
▷
On snow-covered or slippery road.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is turned  
off automatically.  
When there are obstacles that are hard to  
overcome such as curbs.  
▷
▷
▷
When there are obstacles that suddenly ap-  
pear.  
Canceling Automatic Parking  
Assistant manually  
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be can-  
celed manually at any time, e.g.:  
With insufficient distances, which are indi-  
cated by Park Distance Control.  
When a maximum number of parking at-  
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex-  
ceeded.  
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice  
in succession.  
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and  
move the steering wheel slightly at the  
same time.  
When the system is automatically aborted, se-  
lector lever position P is engaged.  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable.  
▷
Depress the brake pedal and operate the  
selector lever at the same time.  
Continuing the parking operation  
If parking or leaving a parking space has been  
interrupted, the operation can be continued, if  
needed.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is canceled  
without engaging selector lever position P.  
Driving can continue immediately.  
Canceling Automatic Parking  
Assistant automatically  
The system automatically cancels in situations  
such as the following:  
Turn the Automatic Parking Assistant on again  
and follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play or in the instrument cluster.  
259  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Maneuver Assistant  
Principle  
No parking assistance  
The Maneuver Assistant provides support for  
recurring parking and maneuvering situations.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not of-  
fer assistance in the following situations:  
Parking and maneuvering operations can be  
recorded and then carried out automatically by  
the system.  
▷
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
For diagonal parking spaces.  
Automatic Parking Assistant: for parking  
spaces that are only marked with lines on  
the ground. The system orients itself ac-  
cording to objects.  
Vehicle features and options  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market version  
or the option for later enabling and software  
updates. This also applies to individual func-  
tions of the system.  
▷
For special parking spaces, e.g., metered  
parking spaces with automatic locking  
mechanisms, or mechanical parking sys-  
tems.  
For information on whether a function is cur-  
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-  
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
▷
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel  
roads.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
On slippery ground.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
General information  
A recurring maneuver is driven manually and  
thereby recorded.  
With accumulations of leaves/snow in the  
parking space.  
▷
▷
▷
In case of changes to an already-measured  
parking space.  
When the vehicle reaches the activation area  
for the distance covered by the stored maneu-  
ver, the maneuver can be activated on the con-  
trol display or in the instrument cluster.  
With ditches or edges, for instance an edge  
of a port.  
Parking spaces that are not suitable may  
be detected or suitable parking spaces may  
not be detected at all.  
After the activation, the system takes control  
of the vehicle and carries out the maneuver  
automatically.  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
In addition, the parking maneuver can be per-  
formed using Remote Control Parking on a  
smartphone.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant has malfunc-  
tioned. Have the vehicle checked by an author-  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
260  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
a stored maneuver can be displayed on the  
control display.  
Safety information  
▷
Activation range, arrow 3: the stored  
maneuver on the control display can be ac-  
tivated within a range of approx. 3.5 ft/1 m.  
After the activation, the system takes con-  
trol of the vehicle and carries out the ma-  
neuver automatically.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors and cameras:  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
Front camera.  
Warning  
The system can steer the vehicle over or  
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Watch surrounding  
traffic closely and actively intervene where  
appropriate  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Recording maneuver  
General information  
Up to ten maneuvers can be recorded at differ-  
ent locations.  
Detection range  
Up to four overlapping maneuvers can be re-  
corded.  
Identical maneuvers under different ambient  
conditions can be recorded such as light condi-  
tions.  
For each maneuver, a maximum distance cov-  
ered of 656 ft/200 m is possible.  
In total, a distance covered of approx.  
1,969 ft/600 m distributed to the ten possible  
maneuvers can be recorded.  
The detection range for a maneuver is divided  
into the following areas:  
▷
Proximity range, arrow 1: the system will  
begin with the localization in the back-  
ground within a range of approx. 26 ft/8 m  
around the distance covered of a stored  
maneuver.  
Maneuvers with a distance covered of less  
than 20 ft/6 m cannot be recorded.  
▷
Close range, arrow 2: in a range of ap-  
prox. 6 ft/2 m around the distance covered,  
261  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
At the end of the parking operation, selec-  
tor lever position P is set.  
Recording maneuver  
1. Drive the vehicle to the starting point from  
which a maneuver must be recorded and  
stop.  
Canceling the Maneuver Assistant  
manually  
The vehicle can be controlled manually during  
an active maneuver by taking the following ac-  
tions:  
2.  
Press the button.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice  
in succession.  
3.  
"Record new path"  
4. Drive the vehicle to the desired end posi-  
tion.  
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and  
move the steering wheel slightly at the  
same time.  
The maneuver is recorded.  
When recording a route, do not drive faster  
than 9 mph/15 km/h.  
▷
Depress the brake pedal and operate the  
selector lever at the same time.  
While recording, the distance covered will  
be displayed.  
The Maneuver Assistant is canceled without  
engaging selector lever position P. Driving can  
continue immediately.  
When the maximum distance covered or  
the maximum speed is reached, a message  
will be displayed and a signal tone will  
sound.  
Canceling the Maneuver Assistant  
automatically  
The system automatically cancels in situations  
such as the following:  
5. With a stationary vehicle: "Save recording"  
6. "Name:"  
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
If necessary, enter the desired name for the  
recorded maneuver.  
▷
When operating the accelerator pedal or  
the selector lever.  
7. "Save recording"  
Do not move the vehicle until the recording  
has been stored.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the driver's seat belt is not fastened.  
With open cargo area.  
Performing stored maneuver  
With open hood.  
1. Drive the vehicle into the activation range  
and stop. The control display and instru-  
ment cluster indicate that a stored maneu-  
ver can be activated.  
With the doors open.  
During activation or intervention by driver  
assistance systems.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the system limits of the ultrasonic  
sensors and cameras are reached.  
2.  
: activate stored maneuver.  
Green: after activation, the system takes  
control of the vehicle and performs the ma-  
neuver automatically. If applicable, follow  
the instructions on the control display or in  
the instrument cluster.  
When changing over to another function on  
the control display.  
When the view on the control display is  
overlaid with messages.  
In case of obstacles.  
The speed can be reduced with the brake.  
Other interventions will cancel the system.  
262  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
On snow-covered or slippery road.  
When the lane is too narrow.  
stance other tires or changed ambient con-  
ditions like light conditions or weather.  
▷
▷
Delayed display of overlapping stored ma-  
neuvers when driving into the activation  
area.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
In the event of an automatic cancellation of  
the system, the vehicle is decelerated to a  
complete stop and selector lever position P is  
engaged.  
In multi-story parking garages, for record-  
ings at different parking levels, or for re-  
cordings that run over several parking lev-  
els.  
An interrupted maneuver can be continued, if  
needed. Turn the Maneuver Assistant on again  
and follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play or in the instrument cluster.  
Remote Control Parking  
Editing stored maneuvers  
Individual or all maneuvers can be deleted or  
renamed.  
Principle  
With Remote Control Parking, the vehicle can  
be driven remotely when parking and maneu-  
vering using the Maneuver Assistant and Park  
Assist Professional.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
The maneuver is performed independently,  
outside the vehicle, using a smartphone. This  
makes it easy to get in and out of the vehicle.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
When parking in a suitable spot, e.g., a garage,  
you can correct the parking position with Re-  
mote Control Parking by maneuvering slightly.  
6. "Recorded paths"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
A maneuver that has already been started can  
be continued at any time with Remote Control  
Parking.  
System limits  
General information  
Vehicle features and options  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market version  
or the option for later enabling and software  
updates. This also applies to individual func-  
tions of the system.  
Functional limitations  
System limits can cause functional limitations  
such as in the following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
With poor GPS reception.  
For information on whether a function is cur-  
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-  
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
In case of recorded maneuvers where the  
system minimum distance to objects can-  
not be maintained.  
▷
Greatly deviating conditions when storing  
and driving the distance covered, for in-  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
263  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Stop the vehicle manually if obstacles are  
present.  
General information  
Note the information in the Automatic Parking  
Assistant and Maneuver Assistant chapter.  
Depending on the option selected in the My  
BMW app, the vehicle is either parked at  
the end of the parking maneuver or you can  
take control of the vehicle again.  
Protect the smartphone against unauthorized  
use.  
The low-beam headlights are switched on for  
the duration of the maneuver.  
System limits  
A parking maneuver offered by Park Assist  
Professional is only available for Remote Con-  
trol Parking for a short time after exiting the  
vehicle.  
Due to ambient conditions, e.g., impaired Blue-  
tooth connection transmission due to external  
faults, Remote Control Parking may be inter-  
rupted.  
If the power supply of the vehicle battery is  
not sufficiently ensured, e.g., due to excessive  
discharge, Remote Control Parking may not  
be available. Follow the instructions in the My  
BMW App.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
All occupants have left the vehicle.  
Doors and cargo area are closed.  
The smartphone is compatible with Re-  
mote Control Parking.  
It may not be easy to maneuver into a parking  
space. This function is offered on the My BMW  
app but cannot be used due to ambient condi-  
tions.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The My BMW App must be installed on a  
compatible smartphone.  
The My BMW App must be linked to a Con-  
nectedDrive account.  
Bluetooth must be enabled on the smart-  
phone.  
Back-up assistant  
The distance between vehicle and smart-  
phone is no greater than approx. 19 ft/6 m.  
Principle  
The Back-up Assistant helps when reversing,  
e.g., when pulling out of tight or unclear park-  
ing or road situations.  
A valid digital key must be set up for the  
vehicle, then recognized without issue.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle features and options  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 92.  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market version  
or the option for later enabling and software  
updates. This also applies to individual func-  
tions of the system.  
Parking with Remote Control  
Parking  
1. Engage selector lever position P.  
2. Leave the vehicle and close the doors and  
trunk.  
For information on whether a function is cur-  
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-  
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
3. Open Remote Control Parking in the My  
BMW app and maneuver forward or back-  
ward, or select the desired parking method.  
4. Follow the instructions on the smartphone.  
Additional information:  
264  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Drive forward without interruption to store  
the distance covered.  
General information  
The vehicle stores the driving movements of  
the last distance covered. This stored distance  
can be driven in reverse with automated steer-  
ing.  
To store the distance covered, do not drive  
faster than 22 mph/35 km/h.  
Back-up Assistant Professional: sufficiently  
bright light conditions on the saved route.  
The system takes over the steering. The driver  
must control the speed using the accelerator  
and brake pedals.  
Back-up Assistant Professional: the cam-  
eras on the vehicle must be clean and clear.  
Back-up Assistant: a maximum of 164 ft/50 m  
are stored.  
Driving in reverse with automated  
steering  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
Back-up Assistant Professional: a maximum of  
656 ft/200 m are stored.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
2.  
3.  
With the vehicle at a standstill, press  
button or engage reverse gear.  
Safety information  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
"Start back-up Assistant"  
Warning  
The length of the distance covered is dis-  
played on the control display and in the in-  
strument cluster.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
If applicable, follow the instructions on the  
control display or in the instrument cluster.  
4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and  
carefully drive in reverse with the accelera-  
tor pedal and the brake.  
Green: the system takes control of  
steering.  
When driving in reverse, observe the vehi-  
cle's surroundings.  
Warning  
In case of obstacles, stop immediately and  
take over control of the vehicle. Follow the  
instructions for Park Distance Control.  
The system can steer the vehicle over or  
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Watch surrounding  
traffic closely and actively intervene where  
appropriate  
5. Right before the end of the stored distance  
covered, a signal tone will sound and a  
message is displayed.  
Stop no later than when normal road traffic  
is reached and take control of the vehicle  
such as by shifting to forward gear.  
265  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
If the maximum speed is exceeded, the  
function is interrupted.  
Canceling the Back-up Assistant  
manually  
The assisted reversing by the Back-up Assis-  
tant can be canceled manually:  
Different influences can lead to side deviations  
when driving the stored distance covered in re-  
verse. For example, this includes the following  
factors:  
▷
▷
"Cancel"  
Press the button.  
▷
Steering movements when the vehicle is  
stationary while storing the distance cov-  
ered.  
▷
▷
▷
The speed is not adapted to the distance  
covered.  
Canceling the Back-up Assistant  
automatically  
The system automatically cancels in situations  
such as the following:  
Certain road characteristics such as gradi-  
ents, inclines or slippery road surface.  
Greatly deviating conditions when storing  
and driving the route, for instance other  
tires or changed ambient conditions like  
weather.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
When shifting from reverse gear to another  
selector lever position.  
▷
Back-up Assistant Professional: for  
changed light conditions.  
During activation or intervention by driver  
assistance systems.  
Also follow the information on system limits in  
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.  
After an extended period of time when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
When exiting the stored lane when revers-  
ing, for instance with maximum steering-  
wheel angle.  
▷
When the view on the control display is  
overlaid with messages.  
▷
▷
In case of a slippery surface.  
When the vehicle is rolling such as on a  
slope.  
▷
▷
In case of changed ambient conditions.  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
6 mph/10 km/h.  
▷
Reversing Assistant Professional: if sensor  
functionality is limited beyond approx. 164  
ft/50 m.  
System limits  
▷
The maximum speed when reversing is  
limited to approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.  
A warning is issued at a speed of approx.  
4 mph/7 km/h.  
266  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
Driving comfort  
Overview  
Vehicle features and options  
Button in vehicle  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Two-axle ride level control  
Self-leveling suspension  
Principle  
The two-axle self-leveling suspension uses air  
springs to ensure the best possible driving  
comfort. Regardless of the load, the vehicle will  
be maintained at the configured vehicle level.  
Functional requirement  
All doors are closed.  
Opening a door while raising or lowering the  
vehicle interrupts the process. The process  
continues after closing the door.  
General information  
The shock absorbers can be set from comfort-  
able to sporty via the My Modes drive modes.  
Depending on the driving situation, the vehicle  
level can be set to different levels:  
Activating/deactivating self-leveling  
suspension  
The system can be deactivated, e.g., to  
change a wheel or for towing.  
▷
▷
Normal level: for normal road condition.  
Elevated level: in poor road conditions or  
for light terrain.  
Deactivate system:  
Press and hold the button for approx.  
7 seconds, until the LED flashes rap-  
idly.  
Safety information  
Warning  
To activate system:  
Adjusting the vehicle height may result in  
trapped body parts or damaged vehicle parts.  
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to  
property. When adjusting the vehicle height,  
make sure that the areas of movement  
around the vehicle and at the wheel housing  
are free.  
Press the button and hold for approx.  
7 seconds, then release.  
The self-leveling suspension is automatically  
activated after driving off at speeds above ap-  
prox. 6 mph/10 km/h.  
267  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
If the vehicle battery charge is too low, the  
vehicle level cannot be changed.  
Setting the vehicle level manually  
Press the button.  
If the vehicle level is frequently changed in  
quick succession, the system switches off  
to prevent overheating and will be tempo-  
rarily unavailable or operate at a delay. Let  
the system cool down, if needed.  
Depending on vehicle speed, using this button  
lifts the vehicle to the raised level.  
▷
If the payload is increased, the highest driv-  
ing level may be disabled or automatically  
exited in order to protect the system.  
LED display  
▷
LED off: Normal vehicle level.  
▷
LED flashes: Vehicle level is being ad-  
justed.  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
▷
▷
LED illuminates: Raised vehicle level.  
LED flashes rapidly: Vehicle level cannot be  
adjusted.  
In case of a malfunction, the vehicle will have  
changed handling characteristics or a noticea-  
bly reduced driving comfort.  
Setting the vehicle level  
automatically  
The vehicle will lower automatically in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized  
service center or another qualified service cen-  
ter or repair shop.  
▷
▷
My Modes: "SPORT".  
At higher speeds.  
BMW IconicSounds  
When a set vehicle level is exited due to the  
speed, the vehicle level will be adjusted ac-  
cording to the selected driving mode.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the vehicle drive sound can be  
adjusted using BMW IconicSounds.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Long stationary periods  
During long stationary periods, the vehicle may  
lower itself. This is not a malfunction.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"  
5. "IconicSounds"  
When the drive-ready state is switched on with  
the doors closed, the vehicle is raised to the  
normal level automatically.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Depending on the condition of the vehicle, rais-  
ing to normal level may take several minutes.  
System limits  
▷
▷
▷
It may not possible to change the vehicle  
level during sporty driving.  
It may not be possible to change the vehicle  
level with articulated axles.  
It may only be possible to raise the vehicle  
level in the drive-ready state.  
268  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Climate control  
Icon  
Function  
Vehicle features and options  
Fresh air.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Air flow.  
Additional information:  
Air distribution.  
SYNC program.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Climate control  
Overview  
Seat heating.  
Panel heating.  
Functions in the Climate menu  
Active seat ventilation.  
Icon  
Function  
Turn the climate control sys-  
tem on/off.  
Steering wheel heating.  
Automatic program.  
Temperature.  
Buttons, automatic climate control  
Air conditioning.  
Maximum cooling.  
Air recirculation mode.  
Icon  
Function  
Defrost function.  
Automatic recirculated-air con-  
trol.  
Rear window defroster.  
269  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Buttons, rear automatic climate control  
Turning the air conditioning system  
on/off  
The climate control system can be turned on or  
off via iDrive.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2.  
Tap the power button.  
Icon  
Function  
The entire climate control system is turned on  
or off with the last settings applied.  
Automatic program.  
When the air conditioning system is turned  
on, individual climate control functions can be  
turned off.  
Temperature.  
Settings  
Air conditioning.  
Maximum cooling.  
Air flow.  
You can configure individual settings for cli-  
mate control functions via iDrive, e.g.:  
▷
▷
▷
Intensity of seat heating.  
Stationary climate control.  
Air conditioning when getting in.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Air distribution.  
Seat and panel heating.  
2. "Individual settings" or "General settings"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Turning rear automatic climate  
control on/off  
Calling up climate control functions  
The Climate menu can be accessed via iDrive:  
Functional requirements  
▷
Automatic climate control is turned on.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu on  
the menu bar.  
▷
Defrost function is deactivated.  
Via iDrive  
Or:  
1.  
Apps menu  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Climate control"  
2. "Individual settings"  
270  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
3. "Second row of seats"  
4. "Rear climate control"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the automatic  
program provides the best possible settings  
for climate control functions depending on  
the outside temperature, interior temperature,  
sunlight, seat occupancy and the desired tem-  
perature setting:  
The rear climate control can be activated with  
the default settings for temperature and the  
AUTO program:  
"Activate with default settings"  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Air flow.  
Air distribution.  
Switching on using the button  
Press one of the following buttons:  
Temperature.  
Seat heating and panel heating.  
Active seat ventilation.  
Steering wheel heating.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.  
Maximum cooling.  
Automatic program.  
The automatic program takes seat occupancy  
into account, regulating the climate in an en-  
ergy-efficient manner that is tailored to the oc-  
cupants.  
Upper side of the air flow, manual button.  
Air distribution, manual.  
Switching off using the button  
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-  
trols the automatic program in order to prevent  
window condensation to the extent possible.  
Press and hold the bottom of the but-  
ton.  
Overview  
Locking the rear automatic climate  
control  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. "Second row of seats"  
4. "Lock rear climate control"  
1
Settings  
Automatic program  
2
3
4
5
Air flow intensity  
Climate control functions bar  
Temperature  
Principle  
The automatic program ensures a comforta-  
ble climate, which can be modified with the  
desired temperature and individual settings.  
Seat heating  
Steering wheel heating  
Active seat ventilation  
The automatic program cools, ventilates or  
heats the vehicle interior automatically.  
271  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Each level has a specific control range of the  
intensity.  
Turning the automatic program  
on/off  
The AUTO program can be switched on or off  
via iDrive.  
Based on the stored data models, the intensi-  
ties are dynamically adjusted while driving. It is  
not necessary to manually change the desired  
intensity to lower or higher levels while driving.  
The individually selected settings of the cli-  
mate control functions are stored and auto-  
matically set up again such as after the vehicle  
is started again.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2.  
Tap the AUTO program button.  
Display  
Switching the rear climate control  
automatic program on/off  
The indicator on the menu bar provides infor-  
mation about the temperature difference be-  
tween the configured desired temperature and  
current interior temperature.  
Via iDrive  
▷
The red or blue bar next to the temperature  
display indicates the progress of heating or  
cooling.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
▷
The desired interior temperature is reached  
as soon as the bar is no longer displayed.  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. "Second row of seats"  
4. "Automatic climate"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Active climate control functions, e.g., seat  
heating, are indicated by the icons on the  
menu bar.  
Using the button  
Temperature  
Press the button.  
The LED of the button is illuminated  
when the automatic program is turned  
Principle  
on.  
The automatic climate control cools or heats  
to the configured temperature and then keeps  
the temperature constant.  
Setting the intensity  
When the automatic program is activated,  
the intensity of individual climate control func-  
tions, e.g., seat heating, is adjusted individu-  
ally.  
General information  
Do not rapidly switch between different tem-  
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-  
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad-  
just the set temperature.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
272  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting the footwell temperature  
Setting the temperature  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. "Driver" or "Front passenger"  
4. "Temperature adjustment for footwell"  
5. Increase or decrease temperature.  
You can set the desired temperature for driver  
and front passenger individually on the menu  
bar.  
Air flow  
Principle  
The air flow generated by the blower can be  
adjusted as needed.  
▷
▷
Raise the temperature.  
Lower the temperature.  
The air flow may be reduced to preserve the  
vehicle battery.  
Setting the rear automatic climate  
control temperature  
Adjusting the air flow  
The air flow can be set via iDrive.  
Via iDrive  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. "Second row of seats"  
4. Set the desired temperature.  
2.  
Select the desired setting.  
Automatic program:  
Using the button  
▷
Tap the large air flow icon to increase the  
air flow.  
Press the upper or lower button side to  
set the desired temperature.  
▷
Tap the small air flow icon to reduce the air  
flow.  
Manual mode:  
Footwell temperature  
▷
▷
Tap up arrow: Increase air flow.  
Tap down arrow: Reduce air flow.  
General information  
The air temperature in the footwell can be ad-  
justed.  
This does not change the set interior tempera-  
ture for the driver and front passenger.  
273  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The selected air distribution is displayed.  
Adjusting the air volume of the rear  
climate control  
Via iDrive  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. "Second row of seats"  
4. "Fan"  
Adjusting the air distribution of the  
rear climate control  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Using the button  
Pressing the upper or lower side of the  
button. Select the desired setting.  
Pressing the upper or lower side of  
The selected air distribution is shown  
on the rear climate control display.  
the button repeatedly: decrease or in-  
crease air flow.  
The selected air flow is shown on the rear cli-  
mate control display.  
Air conditioning  
Air distribution settings  
Principle  
With the climate control function, the air inside  
the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified, then  
warmed again depending on the temperature  
settings.  
Principle  
In manual mode, the air distribution can be  
adjusted as needed.  
Functional requirement  
Standby or drive-ready state is turned on.  
Adjusting the air distribution  
The air distribution can be set via iDrive:  
Switching the cooling function on/off  
The air conditioning can be switched on or off  
via iDrive:  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2.  
Tap the air distribution icon on the  
climate control functions bar.  
3. Select the desired setting:  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
▷
▷
▷
Aim the air flow downward, arrow 1.  
Aim the air flow upward, arrow 2.  
2.  
Tap the air conditioning button.  
In recirculated-air mode, air conditioning is au-  
tomatically switched on to dry the air and avoid  
window condensation.  
Aim the air flow at the windshield , ar-  
row 3.  
274  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the weather, the windshield and  
the side windows may fog up briefly when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
Air recirculation mode  
Principle  
When using the cooling mode, condensation  
that will exit below the vehicle.  
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-  
tants in the immediate environment by tempo-  
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The  
system then recirculates the interior air.  
Maximum cooling  
In automatic recirculated-air control mode, out-  
side air is fed in or the interior air recirculated  
depending on the outside air quality.  
Principle  
Maximum cooling lets you cool the vehicle in-  
terior quickly and effectively.  
When the air recirculation is turned off, outside  
air is directed into the interior.  
The lowest temperature and the maximum air  
flow are set automatically.  
General information  
If there is window condensation, turn off the air  
recirculation.  
The function is automatically activated in the  
rear when the SYNC program is turned on.  
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh  
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation  
mode.  
Functional requirement  
The following functional requirements must be  
met for maximum cooling:  
▷
The outside temperature is higher than ap-  
prox. 32℉ / 0℃.  
Turning air recirculation on/off  
Air recirculation mode can be switched on or  
off via iDrive:  
▷
Standby or drive-ready state is turned on.  
Turning maximum cooling on/off  
Maximum cooling can be turned on or off via  
iDrive:  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. The current operating mode is displayed on  
the climate control functions bar. Tap the  
button until the desired operating mode is  
set.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2.  
Tap the maximum cooling button.  
▷
▷
▷
Recirculating air.  
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body  
area. Open the vents.  
Fresh air.  
Rear automatic climate control:  
Press the button.  
Automatic recirculated-air con-  
The button LED illuminates when max-  
imum cooling is turned on.  
trol.  
In recirculated-air mode, the air conditioning  
turns on automatically to dry the air and pre-  
vent condensation.  
275  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the air recir-  
culation turns off automatically after some time  
based on the ambient conditions in order to  
prevent condensation.  
Defrost function  
Principle  
With the defrost function, ice and condensation  
are quickly removed from the windshield and  
the front side windows.  
SYNC program  
The air flow and air temperature are automati-  
cally optimized for the removal of ice and con-  
densation.  
Principle  
If SYNC program is activated, the settings on  
the driver's side are transfered to the passeng-  
er's side and to the rear.  
The air distribution is directed toward the  
windshield and front side windows.  
If the SYNC program is deactivated, the follow-  
ing settings are made automatically in the au-  
tomatic program depending on the seat occu-  
pancy:  
If there is window condensation, turn on the  
automatic program to take advantage of the  
condensation sensor.  
When the defrost function is turned on, the rear  
automatic climate control is deactivated to pro-  
vide maximum performance.  
▷
If the front passenger's seat is not occu-  
pied, the settings on the driver's side are  
applied.  
Turning the defrost function on/off  
▷
If the seats in the rear are unoccupied, the  
default settings are applied.  
Press the defrost button on the instru-  
ment panel.  
General information  
The following settings can be transferred:  
The LED of the button is illuminated  
when the system is switched on.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.  
Air flow.  
Make sure that air is able to flow to the wind-  
shield and front side windows.  
Air distribution.  
Automatic program.  
Rear window defroster  
Turning the SYNC program on/off  
The SYNC program can be switched on or off  
via iDrive:  
Principle  
With the rear window defroster, ice and con-  
densation are quickly removed from the rear  
window.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Functional requirement  
Standby or drive-ready state is turned on.  
2.  
Tap the SYNC program button.  
If the settings on the front passenger side or in  
the rear are changed, the program is automati-  
cally switched off.  
276  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Turning the rear window defroster  
on/off  
Press the rear window heating button  
on the instrument panel.  
The LED in the button illuminates  
when the rear window heating is turned on.  
The rear window defroster switches off auto-  
matically after a certain period of time.  
1. Tap the icon for seat climate control on the  
menu bar, arrow 1.  
If pre-conditioning is turned on, the rear win-  
dow defroster is activated as needed.  
2.  
Press the seat heating button re-  
peatedly until the desired level is selected,  
arrow 2.  
Seat heating  
If a consumption-optimized drive mode is se-  
lected, the heater output is reduced.  
Principle  
The system heats seats and panels as  
needed.  
Turning the rear automatic climate  
control seat heating on/off  
General information  
Seat heating can also be used without panel  
heating. Deactivate panel heating as neces-  
sary.  
Press the button once for each temper-  
ature level.  
The maximum temperature is reached  
when three LEDs are illuminated.  
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi-  
nutes after an intermediate stop, the functions  
are turned on automatically with the tempera-  
ture that was last set.  
Active seat ventilation  
Adjusting seat heating  
Principle  
The system cools the seat and backrest sur-  
faces as necessary, ensuring a pleasant seat  
temperature.  
Automatic program  
When the automatic program is activated, the  
intensity of seat heating can be adjusted: As  
you drive, the heater output is automatically  
adjusted according to your set intensity.  
Adjusting active seat ventilation  
Automatic program  
Adjusting seat heating manually  
When the AUTO program is on, the intensity  
of seat ventilation can be adjusted. As you  
drive, the ventilation is automatically adjusted  
according to the set intensity.  
The heater output level can be adjusted man-  
ually:  
277  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting the active seat ventilation  
manually  
The ventilation level can be adjusted manually:  
1. Tap the icon for seat climate control on the  
menu bar, arrow 1.  
2.  
Press the steering wheel heating  
button repeatedly until the desired level is  
selected, arrow 2.  
1. Tap the seat climate control icon on the  
menu bar, arrow 1.  
If a consumption-optimized drive mode is se-  
lected, the heater output is reduced.  
2.  
Press the seat ventilation button re-  
peatedly until the desired level is selected,  
arrow 2.  
Panel heating  
Steering wheel heating  
Principle  
The vehicle interior is quickly heated using ra-  
diant heat, which also saves energy.  
Principle  
The system heats the steering wheel as nec-  
essary.  
General information  
The elements of the panel heating are  
integrated in the doors, the glove compartment  
lid and in the lower area of the instrument  
panel.  
Adjusting steering wheel heating  
Automatic program  
When the automatic program is activated, the  
intensity of steering wheel heating can be ad-  
justed. As you drive, the heater output is auto-  
matically adjusted according to your set inten-  
sity.  
The heat is supplied without direct contact to  
the heated surface.  
The set desired temperature heats the surfa-  
ces more or less.  
Adjusting steering wheel heating  
manually  
The heater output level can be adjusted man-  
ually:  
278  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Switching panel heating on/off  
Front ventilation  
The panel heating can be switched on or off in  
addition to the seat heating.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. Select desired seat.  
4. Select the desired setting.  
▷
▷
Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-  
row 1.  
Setting the panel heating  
Knurled wheel for the variable adjustment  
of the air flow on the vents, arrows 2.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Ventilation in the rear  
2. Tap the seat climate control icon on the  
menu bar.  
3. Press the seat heating button repeatedly  
until the desired level is selected.  
Adjusting the rear climate control  
panel heating  
Press the button once for each temper-  
ature level.  
The maximum temperature is reached  
when three LEDs are illuminated.  
▷
▷
Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-  
row 1.  
Knurled wheel for variable opening and  
closing of the air vents, arrow 2.  
Ventilation  
Setting the ventilation  
Depending on the desired ventilation, align the  
air flow directly or indirectly toward the pas-  
sengers.  
Principle  
The ventilation system offers individual adjust-  
ment ranges for direct/indirect ventilation in or-  
der to optimize the flow of air within the vehi-  
cle.  
Air quality  
General information  
Open the air vents and position them to ensure  
effective climate control.  
General information  
The air quality in the interior is improved by the  
following components:  
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depend-  
ing on the set desired temperature.  
279  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Emission tested passenger compartment.  
Interior filter.  
Preconditioning the vehicle while it charges,  
makes it easier for the climate control system  
to regulate the temperature while driving. This  
optimizes the range.  
Air conditioning system to control the  
temperature, air flow and recirculated-air  
mode.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Stationary climate control.  
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.  
▷
The high-voltage battery is sufficiently  
charged or a charging cable is connected.  
Interior filter  
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh  
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation  
mode.  
If the high-voltage battery is deeply dis-  
charged, it may take some time for the  
preconditioning to be functional after the  
charging cable is connected.  
Depending on the equipment:  
▷
Dust and pollen is filtered out from the in-  
flowing air.  
▷
▷
Time and date are set correctly.  
The ventilation air vents are open.  
▷
▷
▷
Nano-particle emissions are reduced.  
Gaseous pollutants are filtered.  
Turning on/turning off the pre-  
conditioning  
Microbial particles, viruses and allergens  
are filtered.  
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends  
having the interior filter changed during vehicle  
maintenance.  
Turning on/turning off via iDrive  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Pre-conditioning  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
Principle  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the vehicle in-  
terior to a comfortable temperature, depend-  
ing on the inside/outside temperature, prior to  
starting a drive. This function makes it easier  
to remove snow and ice.  
Turning on via vehicle key  
The system can be switched on using the vehi-  
cle key.  
Press the button on the vehicle key  
three times within 1 second.  
General information  
The pre-conditioning can be switched on and  
off directly or via a preset departure time.  
After using the vehicle key, it takes ap-  
prox. 3 seconds until pre-conditioning turns on.  
The air automatically exits through the air  
vents to the windshield, the side windows, the  
upper body area and into the footwell.  
Automatic switch-off  
To ensure the vehicle's minimum range, the  
preconditioning may turn off automatically,  
e.g., after repeated activation or because the  
high-voltage battery has insufficient charge. If  
the preconditioning turns off because the ve-  
The system switches off automatically after  
approx. 30 minutes or when the drive-ready  
state is activated.  
280  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
hicle has insufficient charge, charge the high-  
voltage battery. The pre-conditioning is then  
available again.  
Activating the departure time  
To turn on the pre-conditioning prior to a de-  
parture time, the respective departure time  
must be activated beforehand.  
Climate control for departure time  
General information  
Departure times can be set with time and day  
of the week.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "General settings"  
The switch-on point is determined automati-  
cally based on the temperature.  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
4. "Pre-conditioning for departure"  
On the desired weekdays, the system will be  
turned on promptly before the set departure  
time.  
Activating with My BMW App  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the My BMW  
App with remote functionality can be used to  
turn on preconditioning at a preset departure  
time or immediately.  
The departure time is preselected in two steps:  
▷
▷
Set departure times.  
Activate departure times.  
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-  
tween setting and activating the departure  
time and the planned departure time to allow a  
sufficient period of time for the climate control.  
Pre-conditioning will be turned off automati-  
cally a few minutes after the set departure  
time.  
Setting the departure time  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
4. "Departure plan"  
5. Set the desired departure time.  
6. Select day of the week, if needed.  
281  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Interior equipment  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the respective system is clear  
during programming and operation. Also fol-  
low the safety information for the hand-held  
transmitter.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Compatibility  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
If this icon is printed on the packaging  
or in the operating instructions of the  
remote-controlled system, the system  
is generally compatible with the integrated uni-  
versal remote control.  
Integrated universal remote  
control  
Additional questions are answered by:  
Principle  
▷
An authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
The integrated universal remote control in the  
interior mirror can operate remote-controlled  
systems such as garage door openers, alarm  
systems or locking systems.  
▷
on the Internet.  
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex  
Corporation.  
For any additional questions, contact an au-  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
General information  
The integrated universal remote control re-  
places up to three different hand-held trans-  
mitters. To operate the remote control, the  
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-  
grammed with the desired functions.  
Operating elements on the interior  
mirror  
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored  
functions for the sake of security.  
If possible, do not install the antenna of the  
remote-controlled system near metal objects  
to ensure the best possible operation.  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
▷
Buttons, arrow 1.  
LED, arrow 2.  
The operation of remote-controlled systems  
with the integrated universal remote control  
such as the garage door may result in injury,  
for example, body parts becoming jammed in  
a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk  
Hand-held transmitter of the remote-con-  
trolled system, arrow 3.  
282  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Press and hold the button on the interior  
mirror for approx. 2 seconds. Perform  
this procedure three times.  
Programming the integrated  
universal remote control  
If the integrated universal remote con-  
trol remains nonoperational, continue  
with the special features for rolling code  
radio systems.  
Functional requirement  
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must  
be fully charged at the time of programming  
to ensure an optimal range of the integrated  
universal remote control.  
▷
LED does not illuminate green after  
60 seconds: programming not com-  
pleted.  
Programming individual buttons  
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-  
controlled system.  
Repeat steps 3 to 5.  
Special feature of the rolling code  
wireless system  
For systems with a rolling code radio system,  
the integrated universal remote control and the  
system also have to be synchronized.  
2. Turn on standby state.  
3. Select desired button on the interior mirror:  
▷
Program available button:  
Press the button.  
▷
Program already assigned button:  
Refer to information on synchronization in the  
operating instructions of the remote-controlled  
system.  
Press and hold the button for approx.  
20 seconds.  
The LED on the interior mirror will slowly  
begin flashing orange.  
1. Program the desired button on the interior  
mirror.  
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the  
remote-controlled system approx. 1 to  
12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons  
on the interior mirror.  
2. Locate and press the synchronizing button  
on the remote-controlled system such as  
on the garage door.  
You have approx. 30 seconds for the next  
step.  
The required distance depends on the  
hand-held transmitter.  
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a  
second person.  
5. Press and hold the button on the hand-held  
transmitter.  
3. Press and hold the programmed button on  
the interior mirror for approx. 3 seconds.  
Canada: if programming with the hand-held  
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the  
interior mirror button and repeatedly press  
and release the hand-held transmitter but-  
ton for 2 seconds.  
If necessary, repeat this step up to three  
times in order to end synchronization. Once  
synchronization is complete, the program-  
med function will be carried out.  
6. The LED can illuminate in different ways:  
Operation  
After programming, the remote-controlled sys-  
tem can be operated with the button on the  
interior mirror.  
▷
The LED illuminates green: program-  
ming completed.  
Release button.  
▷
The LED flashes green rapidly: the  
hand-held transmitter was detected but  
programming is not complete.  
283  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Press and hold the desired button of the re-  
mote-controlled system within range until the  
function is triggered.  
Sockets  
Principle  
The socket can be used for electronic devi-  
ces when the standby or drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
The LED on the interior mirror is continuously  
illuminated green during the transmission of  
the radio signal.  
Deleting a button assignment  
The button assignment cannot be deleted indi-  
vidually.  
General information  
The total load of all sockets must not exceed  
140 watts at 12 volts.  
Press and hold the two outer buttons on  
the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-  
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green  
rapidly.  
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable  
connectors.  
Safety information  
All stored button assignments will be deleted.  
Warning  
Sun visor  
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of  
the airbags such as portable navigation devi-  
ces can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or  
be thrown around in the car's interior while  
unfolding. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
damage to property. Make sure that devices  
and cables are not in the airbag's area of  
unfolding.  
Glare shield  
Fold the sun visor down or up.  
Glare shield from the side  
Folding the sun visor out  
1. Fold the sun visor down.  
2. Detach it from the holder and swing it to-  
ward the side window.  
NOTICE  
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-  
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the  
vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V  
electrical system. There is a risk of damage  
to property. If the vehicle battery has dis-  
charged, contact an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
3. Shift it back to the desired position.  
Folding the sun visor in  
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun  
visor.  
Vanity mirror  
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be-  
hind a cover.  
Warning  
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-  
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,  
these objects can cause a short circuit and  
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury  
284  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
and risk of damage to property. Make sure  
to prevent metal objects from falling or being  
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the  
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after  
using the socket.  
USB connection, see Owner's Manual for Nav-  
igation, Entertainment, Communication;  
Safety information  
Warning  
Front center console  
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-  
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,  
these objects can cause a short circuit and  
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of damage to property. Make sure  
to prevent metal objects from falling or being  
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the  
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after  
using the socket.  
A socket is located between the smartphone  
tray and the cup holders. Detach the cover.  
In the center console  
In the cargo area  
Two USB ports are located in the center con-  
sole.  
Properties:  
A socket is located on the right side in the  
cargo area. Unfold the cover.  
▷
▷
USB port Type C.  
For charging mobile devices and for data  
transfer.  
▷
Charge current: max. 3 A.  
USB port  
General information  
Follow the information regarding the connec-  
tion of mobile devices to the USB port in the  
section on USB connections.  
Travel & Comfort system  
General information  
The front seat backrests have mounts and var-  
ious connection options:  
Additional information:  
285  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Mounts for attaching optional accessories,  
e.g., universal holders for tablets or coat  
hangers.  
Wireless charging tray  
Principle  
USB ports.  
The wireless charging tray is used to wirelessly  
charge Qi-certified smartphones.  
Properties of the USB ports:  
▷
▷
▷
USB port Type C.  
For charging mobile devices.  
General information  
Quick charging functions are supported de-  
pending on the smartphone.  
Charge current: maximum 3 A / 45 W per  
seat.  
For more information, contact an authorized  
service center or another qualified service cen-  
ter or repair shop.  
The integrated fan cools the device to be  
charged.  
When inserting the smartphone to be charged,  
make sure that there is nothing between the  
smartphone to be charged and the wireless  
charging tray.  
Overview  
The charging process is shown by the  
charge indicator on the control display.  
Safety information  
Warning  
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the  
wireless charging tray, any metal objects on  
the tray together with the device can become  
very hot. Storage media or electronic cards,  
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips, or  
cards for transmitting signals, may not func-  
tion correctly when placed together on the  
tray with the device. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of damage to property. When charg-  
ing mobile devices, make sure there are no  
objects on the tray together with the device.  
The mounts for attaching optional accessories  
are located behind the marked covers.  
Attaching optional accessories  
1. Slide the cover down.  
Overview  
Tray in the center console:  
2. Mount the optional accessories, refer to As-  
sembly Instructions.  
286  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Forgotten warning  
General information  
A warning may be issued if a Qi-certified  
smartphone was forgotten in the wireless  
charging tray when leaving the vehicle.  
The forgotten warning is displayed in the in-  
strument cluster.  
1
Storage area  
Fan  
Enable/Disable Forgotten Warning  
2
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Functional requirements  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Wireless charging tray"  
5. "Mobile phone reminder"  
▷
The smartphone to be charged must be Qi-  
certified.  
▷
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
Charging function is turned on.  
System limits  
The charge current may be reduced or charg-  
ing may be temporarily interrupted in the wire-  
less charging tray in the following situations:  
The smartphone cannot exceed maximum  
dimensions of approx. 6.69 x 3.34 x  
0.7 in/170 x 85 x 18 mm.  
▷
▷
▷
Protective sleeves and covers must be suit-  
able for wireless charging.  
▷
▷
▷
Due to excessive temperatures on the tray  
and smartphone.  
The rubber mat is located in the storage  
compartment.  
If there are objects between the smart-  
phone and wireless charging tray.  
The smartphone to be charged is located  
in the center of the tray. The smartphone  
display is facing up.  
If storage media or electronic cards,  
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic  
stripes, or cards for signal transmission, are  
located between the smartphone and wire-  
less charging tray.  
Activating/deactivating charging  
1.  
Apps menu  
▷
▷
Due to protective sleeves and covers that  
exceed a thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm  
2. "Vehicle"  
Due to protective sleeves and covers made  
of unsuitable material, e.g., with magnetic  
parts.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Wireless charging tray"  
5. "Wireless charging"  
▷
▷
Due to add-on parts for the smartphone,  
e.g., holders.  
Inserting a smartphone  
Place the smartphone in the middle of the tray,  
with the display facing up.  
By configuring the smartphone settings,  
e.g., for charging. Follow the instructions  
given on the control display and smart-  
phone, as applicable.  
287  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Data transfer and data storage  
Whether recording data will be sent or stored  
depends on the recording function.  
Interior camera  
Principle  
Interior camera:  
The interior camera can be used to record the  
vehicle interior.  
▷
Data transfer to a mobile device, connec-  
tion to the vehicle via WLAN.  
▷
Data is saved to the vehicle and assigned  
to the BMW ID or driver profile.  
General information  
The interior camera can provide the following  
functions:  
Remote Inside View:  
▷
Sending data to a mobile device via the My  
BMW App, connected with ConnectedDrive  
account.  
▷
Interior camera.  
You can record, save and display media.  
Remote Inside View.  
▷
▷
Data is saved to the My BMW App and,  
after data is sent, to the mobile device.  
The vehicle interior can be recorded using  
the My BMW App.  
Anti-theft recorder:  
▷
Anti-theft recorder.  
▷
Sending data to a mobile device via the My  
BMW App, connected with ConnectedDrive  
account.  
If the alarm system is triggered, the vehicle  
interior is automatically recorded. Record-  
ings can also be played using the My BMW  
App.  
▷
Data is stored in the vehicle and after the  
data transfer in the mobile device.  
More information on the scope and content of  
data processing is available on the Internet in  
the ConnectedDrive privacy notices/service de-  
scriptions.  
Data protection  
General information  
The permissibility of recording and using re-  
cordings is contingent upon the statutory regu-  
lations of the country in which the system is to  
be used. The user is responsible for the use of  
the system and compliance with the respective  
regulations.  
Functional requirements  
Interior camera:  
▷
Privacy Policy accepted.  
Data protection, refer to page 73.  
The camera is activated.  
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that  
you verify there are no statutory or regulatory  
restrictions on using the system in your region  
or country prior to initial use. In addition, the  
laws with respect to use of the system should  
be verified in regular intervals, especially when  
borders are frequently crossed.  
▷
To transfer recordings to mobile devices:  
▷
▷
Data transfer is activated.  
Mobile device is connected to the vehicle  
via WLAN.  
Remote Inside View/Anti-theft recorder:  
Other users and occupants of the vehicle must  
be informed about the system. In addition, in-  
formation about the system is required when  
handing off the vehicle.  
▷
▷
Privacy Policy accepted.  
My BMW App is installed on the mobile de-  
vice.  
▷
My BMW App is linked with the Connected-  
Drive account.  
288  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Vehicle is parked and locked.  
Interior camera  
Anti-theft recorder: equipped with alarm  
system.  
Recording mode  
Ensure that the faces of occupants are visible  
and are not partially or completely covered, for  
instance by face masks.  
Recording  
mode  
Function  
"Single  
photo"  
Shortly after triggering, a  
photo will be taken.  
Overview  
"Smile"  
When the system detects a  
smile, a picture will be taken.  
"Self-timer  
(3 sec.)"  
After the timer has expired, a  
photo will be taken.  
"Burst  
mode"  
Shortly after triggering, a ser-  
ies of pictures will be taken.  
Take picture  
The interior camera is located on the head-  
liner.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
Additional information:  
3. "Interior camera"  
4. "Photo"  
Around the headliner, refer to page 40.  
Activating/deactivating interior  
camera  
5. Select desired recording mode.  
6. Triggering a photo.  
Prior to the first use of the interior camera,  
the recording function and, if necessary, data  
transfer must be activated. To do this, confirm  
the query on the control display. Additional  
activation may be required for some system  
functions.  
Depending on the selected recording mode,  
the photo occurs shortly after the triggering,  
when a smile is recognized or the timer has  
elapsed.  
For burst shots, the series of pictures will be  
displayed as a preview.  
Follow applicable legal regulations.  
Recording video  
1. "MENU"  
The recording function or data transfer can be  
deactivated or activated.  
2. "All apps"  
1.  
Apps menu  
3. "Interior camera"  
4. "Video"  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Interior camera"  
4. "Settings"  
5. Start video recording.  
You can only record video for a certain time.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
289  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Displaying and managing  
recordings  
Saved recordings can be displayed, transferred  
and deleted in the vehicle.  
Anti-theft recorder  
If the alarm system is triggered, the vehicle in-  
terior is automatically recorded. The My BMW  
App issues a notification when recordings are  
being taken. The recording can be shown on a  
mobile device.  
With some national-market versions, record-  
ings are only shown on the control display  
when the vehicle speed is less than approx.  
2 mph/3 km/h for safety reasons.  
Up to three recordings can be saved to the  
vehicle and synchronized with the My BMW  
App. If the vehicle is reset to factory settings,  
recordings saved to the vehicle are deleted.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
Occupying the seats  
The interior camera is also used for the detec-  
tion of occupied seats.  
3. "Interior camera"  
4. "Gallery"  
5. Select the desired recording.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
When all doors are closed, the interior camera  
switches on automatically on a regular basis.  
This system analyzes the vehicle interior to  
detect which seats are occupied. No media  
recordings are made in the process. Two in-  
frared light sources next to the camera lens  
illuminate while the interior camera is active.  
Depending on the lighting conditions, the infra-  
red light sources may be visible.  
Scan the QR code shown on the control dis-  
play to send recordings to a mobile device.  
The recording is transferred when the pop-up  
on the mobile device is opened. The mobile  
device must be connected to the vehicle via  
WLAN.  
Settings  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Interior camera"  
4. "Settings"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
An individual gesture can be assigned for re-  
cordings with the interior camera.  
Remote Inside View  
Recordings of the vehicle interior can be  
played on a mobile device using the My BMW  
App in order to check the vehicle interior, e.g.,  
for forgotten objects.  
The function is not suitable for monitoring peo-  
ple or animals left behind.  
290  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Storage compartments  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can  
damage the dashboard. Attached objects  
could come loose. There is a risk of injury  
or risk of damage to property. Do not use  
anti-slip pads.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Glove compartment  
Safety information  
Opening the glove compartment  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-  
erty. Secure loose objects or devices that are  
connected to the vehicle via a cable.  
Press the button.  
Warning  
Closing the glove compartment  
Open flaps of the storage compartments,  
e.g., glove compartment or center armrest,  
protrude into the interior when folded open  
and may be in the way of an airbag that  
deploys. In addition, objects in the open stor-  
age compartment can be thrown into the ve-  
hicle interior during the trip, for instance, in  
the event of an accident or when braking or  
making an evasive maneuver. There is a risk  
of injury. Always close storage compartments  
immediately after use.  
Fold the lid closed.  
Storage compartments in  
the doors  
General information  
There are storage compartments in the doors.  
A holder for smartphones is located in the  
armrest of the front passenger door.  
291  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Front cup holder  
Warning  
Safety information  
Breakable objects such as glass bottles or  
glasses can break in the event of an acci-  
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. Bro-  
ken glass can be scattered in the car's inte-  
rior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Do not use any breakable objects  
while driving. Only stow breakable objects in  
closed storage compartments.  
Warning  
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may  
damage the cup holders or be thrown about  
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,  
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.  
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-  
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and  
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can  
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.  
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Do not force objects into the  
cup holder. Make sure that drink containers  
are secured firmly in the cup holder. Use  
lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable con-  
tainers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately.  
Do not transport hot beverages.  
Front center armrest  
General information  
A storage compartment is located in the center  
armrest between the seats.  
Opening the center armrest  
Overview  
Press the button.  
Two cup holders are located in the center con-  
sole.  
Closing the center armrest  
Press both lids down until they engage.  
292  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Opening the cup holder  
1. Fold down the center armrest.  
Rear cup holder  
Safety information  
Warning  
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may  
damage the cup holders or be thrown about  
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,  
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.  
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-  
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and  
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can  
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.  
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Do not force objects into the  
cup holder. Make sure that drink containers  
are secured firmly in the cup holder. Use  
lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable con-  
tainers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately.  
Do not transport hot beverages.  
2. Press the button.  
3. The cup holder extends.  
NOTICE  
Closing the cup holder  
Push the cup holder back until it engages.  
With an open cup holder, the center armrest  
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of  
damage to property. Press back the covers  
before the center armrest is folded up.  
Coat hooks  
General information  
Two folding coat hooks are provided on the  
headliner in the rear of the vehicle. Press side-  
ways onto the edge to fold open.  
Two additional coat hooks are located on the  
body pillars in the rear.  
293  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Warning  
Clothing articles on the coat hooks can ob-  
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of  
accident. When suspending clothing articles  
from the coat hooks, ensure that they will not  
obstruct the driver's view.  
Warning  
Improper use of the coat hooks can lead to a  
risk of objects flying about during braking and  
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of damage to property. Only hang  
lightweight objects, for instance clothing arti-  
cles, from the coat hooks.  
294  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Cargo area  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
Improperly stowed objects can slip and be  
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in  
the event of an accident, braking or an eva-  
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit  
and injured. There is a risk of injury and risk  
of damage to property. Stow and secure ob-  
jects and cargo properly.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Loading  
NOTICE  
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Make  
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.  
Safety information  
Warning  
High gross vehicle weight can overheat the  
tires, damage them internally and cause  
a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving char-  
acteristics may be negatively impacted, re-  
ducing directional stability, lengthening the  
braking distances and changing the steering  
response. There is a risk of accident, injury,  
or property damage. Pay attention to the  
permitted load-carrying capacity of the tires  
and never exceed the permitted gross vehicle  
weight.  
Steps for determining correct load  
limit  
1. Locate the statement “The combined  
weight of occupants and cargo should  
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the  
vehicle’s placard.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the  
driver and passengers that will be riding in  
the vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs  
4. The resulting figure equals the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load ca-  
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount  
equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five  
150 lbs passengers in the vehicle, the  
amount of available cargo and luggage  
load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x  
150) = 650 lbs)  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-  
erty. Secure loose objects or devices that are  
connected to the vehicle via a cable.  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage  
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.  
That weight may not safely exceed the  
295  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
available cargo and luggage load capacity  
calculated in Step 4.  
▷
▷
Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi-  
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the  
rear seat backrests.  
6. If the vehicle will be towing a trailer, load  
from your trailer will be transferred to the  
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine  
how this reduces the available cargo and  
luggage load capacity of the vehicle.  
Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as  
possible, directly behind and at the bottom  
of the rear seat backrests. When the rear  
seat is not occupied, secure each of the  
outer seat belts in the opposite buckle.  
Payload  
Lashing eyes in the cargo  
area  
General information  
Attach auxiliary materials to secure the cargo  
such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw  
straps, or cargo nets to the lashing eyes.  
The maximum payload is the sum of the  
weight of the occupants and the cargo.  
Overview  
The greater the weight of the occupants, the  
less cargo that can be transported.  
Stowing and securing cargo  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cover sharp edges and corners on the  
cargo.  
Do not stack cargo above the upper edge of  
the backrests.  
The lashing eyes are located on the side pan-  
els in the cargo area.  
If necessary, fold down the rear backrests  
to stow large cargo.  
Fasten the aids for securing the load to the  
lashing eyes in the cargo area.  
Multifunction hook  
Depending on vehicle equipment, use the  
cargo area partition net to protect occu-  
pants. Make sure that objects cannot pene-  
trate the cargo area partition net.  
General information  
A multifunction hook is located on the right  
side in the cargo area.  
▷
▷
Small and light cargo: secure with tension-  
ing straps or tension bands or with a lug-  
gage compartment net.  
Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo  
straps.  
296  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Rear storage compartment  
General information  
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the  
left in the storage compartment.  
Warning  
Improper use of the multifunction hooks can  
lead to a risk of objects flying about, e.g., dur-  
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is  
a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-  
erty. Only hang lightweight objects from the  
multifunction hooks. Heavy luggage in the  
trunk must be properly secured.  
The cargo area partition net can be stowed in  
the corresponding mounts.  
Opening the storage compartment  
Folding out the multifunction hook  
Pull on the handle and fold the cargo area floor  
forward.  
Closing the storage compartment  
Press the cargo floor panel down, until it en-  
gages.  
Fold out the multifunction hook.  
Retaining strap  
Front storage compartment  
A retaining strap is available on the left side  
trim panel for fastening small objects.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Cargo floor panel  
Improper use of the cargo area floor can lead  
to a risk of objects flying about during braking  
and evasive maneuvers, for example. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-  
erty.  
General information  
There are storage compartments beneath the  
cargo floor panel.  
▷
Do not use the cargo area floor to sepa-  
rate the cargo area and vehicle interior  
in the sense of a luggage net.  
Payload  
For the storage under the cargo area floor,  
do not exceed a maximum payload of  
44 lbs/20 kg.  
▷
Only use the cargo area floor in the  
folded-up position when the rear seat  
backrests are folded up and locked.  
297  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Fold down the cargo area floor before  
driving off.  
Removing the cargo floor panel  
1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel  
forward.  
Always secure cargo against slipping,  
using straps, belts and lashing eyes, for  
instance.  
2. Slightly raise the cargo area floor.  
3. Pull the cargo area floor back and out of the  
brackets and remove.  
Opening the storage compartment  
Fold the cargo area floor folded forward up to  
the latching point.  
Inserting the cargo floor panel  
Proceed in reverse order to insert the cargo  
area floor:  
When the cargo area floor is folded further up-  
ward, it will be released from the holders.  
1. Position the folded cargo area floor flat at  
the mounts.  
Additional information:  
Insert cargo area floor, refer to page 298.  
2. Push the cargo area floor forward into the  
mounts. The cargo area floor engages no-  
ticeably.  
Closing the storage compartment  
Enlarging the cargo area  
Principle  
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding  
down the rear seat backrests.  
General information  
Push the cargo floor panel downward.  
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of  
40–20–40. The side rear seat backrests and  
the center section can be folded down sepa-  
rately.  
The rear seat backrests can be folded down  
from the rear or from the cargo area.  
298  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Folding down the rear seat backrest  
From the rear  
Warning  
Vehicle parts can be damaged or body parts  
jammed when folding down the rear seat  
backrest. There is a risk of injury or risk of  
damage to property. Make sure that the area  
of movement of the rear seat backrest includ-  
ing head restraint is clear when folding down.  
Warning  
Pull the switch and fold the rear seat backrest  
forward.  
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-  
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s  
interior; for instance, in the event of an acci-  
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. There  
is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat  
backrest is locked after folding it back.  
From the cargo area  
Warning  
The stability of the child restraint system is  
limited or compromised with incorrect seat  
setting or improper installation of the child  
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Make sure that the child restraint system fits  
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-  
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests  
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that  
seats and backrests are securely engaged or  
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the  
height of the head restraints or remove them.  
Pull the switch inside the cargo area.  
▷
Upper switch: the right rear seat backrest  
folds forward.  
▷
Lower switch: the left and middle rear seat  
backrests fold forward.  
Folding back the rear seat backrest  
Return the rear seat backrest to the seat posi-  
tion and engage it.  
Warning  
Once the rear seat backrest has been folded  
down, the locking bracket protrudes into the  
car's interior. There is a risk of damage to  
property. When the rear seat backrest is  
folded down, pay attention to the protrud-  
ing locking bracket and keep this area unob-  
structed.  
299  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Opening the through-loading  
system  
Warning  
An incorrectly inserted cargo cover can be  
thrown about the car's interior such as in the  
event of an accident or a braking or evasive  
maneuver. There is a risk of injury and risk  
of damage to property. Make sure the cargo  
cover is securely engaged in the brackets.  
Removing cargo covers  
The cover can be removed to load bulky lug-  
gage.  
Fold down the center armrest and pull on the  
loop.  
Cover in the trunk  
1. Push the rear edge of the cargo cover up  
and out of the side brackets, arrow 1.  
Cargo cover  
Safety information  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-  
erty. Secure loose objects or devices that are  
connected to the vehicle via a cable.  
2. Pull out cargo cover, arrows 2.  
Cover in the tailgate  
1. Open the tailgate.  
2. Release cover on both sides.  
Warning  
To do so, pull back the cover on the under-  
side.  
Body parts can become trapped when the  
folding cargo cover is operated. There is a  
risk of injury. When operating the folding  
cargo cover, make sure that the travel path  
of the cover is clear.  
300  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
3. Lift the cover slightly.  
Enlarging the cargo area, refer to  
page 298.  
4. Remove the cover along the guide towards  
the rear.  
2. Open the front cover caps up on the roof  
frame until they engage.  
Inserting the cargo covers  
Proceed in the reverse order to reinstall. Make  
sure that the cargo covers are positioned cor-  
rectly in the brackets and that they are en-  
gaged.  
Cover in the cargo area:  
1. Place cover on the left and right.  
2. Lift the rear cover slightly and push it for-  
wards.  
3. Insert each of the two top retaining pins  
of the cargo area partition net into the re-  
ceptacles until they reach the stop, arrow 1,  
and push them forward. Make sure that the  
belt adjusters for the bottom hooks point  
forward.  
3. Push down the cover on the rear edge until  
it snaps into place on both side brackets.  
Cover in the tailgate:  
1. Insert the cover along the guide into the top  
brackets.  
2. Push the cover on the underside forward  
until it snaps into place on both side brack-  
ets.  
Cargo area partition net  
General information  
The cargo area partition net can be installed in  
two different positions in the vehicle.  
4. Attach the cargo area partition net with the  
lower two front hooks into the two loops  
on the folded down rear seat backrest, ar-  
rows 2. Loosen both tensioning belts on the  
bottom of the partition net as necessary.  
With the rear seat backrest folded  
down  
1. Fold down the rear seat backrests.  
5. After loading, pull both partition net ten-  
sioning belts tight.  
301  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
4. Stow the cargo area partition net on the left  
under the side trim panel and lower on the  
right. The retaining pins must point up.  
With the rear seat backrest upright  
1. Remove the cargo cover.  
2. Open the rear cover caps up on the roof  
frame until they engage.  
5. Push the cargo floor panel downward.  
3. Insert each of the two top retaining pins of  
the cargo area partition net into the recep-  
tacles until they reach the stop, arrow 1, and  
push them forward.  
4. Hook the cargo area partition net with the  
lower two hooks into the two loops on the  
rear seat backrest, arrows 2.  
5. Pull both tensioning belts tight on the bot-  
tom of the partition net.  
Stowing the partition net  
The cargo area partition net can be stowed  
under the cargo floor panel.  
1. Remove the cargo area partition net.  
2. Roll up the cargo area partition net and  
pack it with the hook and loop tape.  
3. Fold the cargo area floor open.  
302  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
303  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39992 - II/24  

Related Topics

Dashboard Sensors of the vehicle Operating state of the vehicle BMW iDrive BMW Remote Software Upgrade Personal settings Opening and closing Seats, mirrors and steering wheel Transporting children safely Driving Displays Light and view Safety Driving stability control systems Driver assistance systems Parking Driving comfort Climate control Interior equipment Storage compartments Cargo area

Popular Owner Manuals

Audi
Audi
BMW
BMW
Citroen
Citroen
Ford
Ford
Honda
Honda
Peugeot
Peugeot